Molded Case. Circuit Breakers. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents

Transcription

1 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0467] -1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents Description Page Product Line Overview Product Line Description Standards and Certifications Quick Reference Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Amperes Motor Circuit Protectors Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Internal Accessories External Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family

2 -2 Product Line Overview January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0468] Product Line Description Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as,... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as,... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The NEC describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Cutler-Hammer offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This family of circuit breakers includes: Thermal Magnetic Trip Breakers Electronic rms Trip Breakers Molded Case Switches Motor Circuit Protectors Current Limiting Breakers Special Application Breakers World Breakers Special Calibration Special non-ul-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 C and for frequencies other than 0/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. Maximum thermal calibration is limited to 13A at 400 Hz. H Hz 20% Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. J01 Fungus Treated Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at -40 C. F01 Freeze Tested Marine Applications F-Frame circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46 ABS American Bureau of Shipping IEEE 4 These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 0 C ambient calibration, special nameplating, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied. Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL489 Supplement SA (Marine Use) and UL489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 6 feet in length. Requirements include 40 C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. H08 Marine UL 489 Supplement SB requires 0 C ambient calibration, vibration testings, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. H09 Naval $ % 20% 10% 10% Standards and Certifications Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, Molded Case Circuit Breakers Australian Standard AS 2184, British Standards Institution Standard BS 472: Part 1, Switchgear and Control Gear Part 1: Circuit Breakers Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No., Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 17-1, Circuit Breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard Molded Case Circuit Breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 16, Standard Specification for Molded Case Circuit Breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 17-1, Safety Regulations for Circuit Breakers Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 63-0, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Circuit Breaker Requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear, Circuit Breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-37b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. 0 C Calibration Add suffix V to for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 0 C ambients. Note: For further information, see Circuit Breaker, CD-ROM SA.74A.01.T.E.

3 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0469] Product Line Overview -3 Quick Reference Table -1. Industrial Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type G-Frame GB GB GHB GHB GHB GHB HGHB GQ GHBS GBHS GC GC GD GD GHC GHC GHC GHC HGHC Cont. 40 C New E Frame No. Poles 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, , 2 1, 2 1 2, , 3 1 2, 3 1 EB 1 1 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 20V DC. Not defined in W-C-37b. Volts Type Federal UL Listed Interrupting s rms Symmetrical Amperes AC DC of Spec. Trip AC s Volts DC W-C- 37b 0 0/ / / / / / /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 20 /20 /20 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 11a 10b, 11b, b, 14b, 1b 11a 10b, 11b, b, 14b, 1b c, 13a, 13b 11a 10b, 11b, b, 14b, 1b 13b 13b 20 N.I.T. c, 13a 13b c, 13a 13b 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 3,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 2,000 2,000 14,000 14,000 2,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 2,000 18,000 14,000 14,000 22,000 14,000 18,000 10,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 10,000 14,000 14,000 EE 1 2, 3, 4 Y/ N.I.T. 3,000 2,000 18,000 10,000 10, ES 1 1 2, 3, 4 EH 1 1 2, 3, 4 F-Frame ED EDH EDC EHD EHD FDB FDB FD FD FD HFD HFD HFD FDC FDC New J20 Frame J20E J20S J20H , 3 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, , ,3 4 2, 3 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, Y/ Y/ N.I.T. N.I.T. 20 N.I.T N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. I.T I.T I.T b 14b 1 13a 13b 18a 13a 22a 13a 22a 24a, ,000 8,000 8,000,000,000 6,000, ,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 6,000 6,000,000, , ,000 6,000 8,000,000 3,000 6,000 14,000 2,000 6,000 3,000 6,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 2,000 2,000 6,000 6,000,000,000 2,000 3,000 6,000 22,000 2,000 14,000 14,000 18,000 18,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 18,000 18,000 2,000 3,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 3,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 Page

4 -4 Product Line Overview January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0470] Table -1. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type J-Frame JDB JD HJD JDC K-Frame Cont. 40 C No. Poles 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 Volts Type Federal UL Listed Interrupting s rms Symmetrical Amperes AC DC of Spec. Trip AC s Volts DC W-C-37b 0 0/ / N.I.T. I.T I.T I.T 22a 22a 22a 22a N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 20V DC. 6,000 6,000, ,000 3,000 3,000 6,000,000 18,000 18,000 2,000 3,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 DK , N.I.T. 14b 6,000 10, KDB KD CKD HKD CHKD KDC L-Frame LDB LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC M-Frame MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL N-Frame ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC , 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, N.I.T. I.T I.T I.T I.T I.T N.I.T. I.T I.T I.T I.T I.T I.T I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A 6,000 6,000 6,000,000, ,000 6,000 6,000 6,000,000, , ,000 6,000 6,000,000,000 6,000 6,000,000, , ,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 6,000 6,000,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 6,000 6,000,000,000 0,000 0,000 6,000 6,000 0,000 0,000 6,000 6,000,000,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 0,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 0,000 0,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 0,000 0,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 22,000 22,000 2,000 2,000 Page , -42, -46, -47-4, -48, , -42, -46, -47-4, -48, , -42, -46, , -7, -61-8, -64-6, -7, -61-8, -64-6, -7, -62-8, -6-71, , , -91-8, , , , , -93

5 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0471] Product Line Overview - Table -1. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type R-Frame RD 1 CRD 1 RD 2000 RD 200 CRD 2000 RDC 1 CRDC 1 RDC 2000 RDC 200 CRDC 2000 Cont. 40 C No. Poles 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 Volts Type Federal UL Listed Interrupting s rms Symmetrical Amperes AC DC of Spec. Trip AC s Volts DC W-C-37b 0 0/ /20 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 24a 24a 24a 24a 24a 2a 2a 2a 2a 2a N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 20V DC.,000,000, ,000, , , , , ,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000,000,000,000,000,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 Series C HMCP Motor Circuit Protectors -118 Current Limit R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Non-Fused Type FCL 1 2, N.I.T. 200,000 10,000-9 LCL 400 2, 3 N.I.T. 200, ,000, Tri-Pac Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused Type FB 1 2, 3 20 N.I.T. 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a LA , 3 20 I.T. 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a NB , 3 20 I.T. 16b, 17a, 26a Page , , ,000, , , ,000, , , ,000, PB 1 2, 3 20 I.T. 17a, 26a 200, , ,000,

6 -6 1 Amperes G-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0472] Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Product Selection Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Type GD Molded Case Switches Type GB, GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Types GC, GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers Type GHCGFEP Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Special Purpose GC and GHC Circuit Breakers Product Description All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all 3-phase Delta (240V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Single-pole circuit breakers, 1 and 20 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications. All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. HACR rated. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Table -2. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type GD 2 3 of Poles Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. Table -3. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type of Poles GB 1 2, 3 GQ GHB 1 2, 3 1 through 70A breakers only. Terminal Types Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC / For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below. Table -4. Terminal Types Optional GD Only 1 Pressure (Steel Body) Slotted Cu 14 3 Not UL listed sizes. Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC Y/277 / HGHB GC 1 2, 3 GHC 1 2, HGHC Circuit Breaker Amperes Standard Terminal Type Material Clamp (Plated Steel) Pressure (Aluminum Body) Screw Head Type Slotted Slotted Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al AWG Wire Range / Metric Wire Range (mm 2 )

7 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0473] 1 Amperes G-Frame -7 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System G D K Circuit Breaker Type GD GB GHB GC GHC GQ of Poles 1 = 1 Pole 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles Trip Amperes K = Molded Case Switch D = Ring Type Terminals C = Steel Collars V = 0 C J01 = Fungus Proofed R01 = Shock Tested F01 = Freeze Tester HID = High Intensity Discharge

8 -8 1 Amperes G-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0474] Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Product Selection Table -6. Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 480V AC Maximum, 20V DC Includes Binding V AC Head Screws Includes Line and Load Terminals 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Pole GD201 GD2020 GD202 GD2030 GD203 GD2040 GD204 GD GD301 GD3020 GD302 GD3030 GD303 GD3040 GD304 GD300 GD3060 GD3070 GD3080 GD3090 GD GD301D GD3020D GD302D GD3030D GD303D GD3040D GD304D GD300D GD3060D GD3070D GD3080D GD3090D GD3D Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C102 Type GD Molded Case Switches Product Selection Table -7. Type GD Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C 3-Pole V AC Maximum, 20V DC (Includes Line and Load Terminals) GD3060K GD3K Note: Molded Case Switches may open above 1300A. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C102

9 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [047] Types GB, GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers Typical GB Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: Types GB, GHB, 0 and 240V: 1 Pole: Class 11a 2, 3 Poles: Classes 10b, 11b, b, 14b, 1b Type GHB, 277 and 480Y/277V: 1 Pole: Classes c, 13a 2, 3 Poles: Class 13b Type HGHB 277V Type GQ 277V 1 Amperes G-Frame Product Selection Table -8. Type GB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 0V AC Maximum, 240V AC Maximum, 240V AC Maximum, Ampere V DC Maximum /20V DC Maximum /20V DC 40 C 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole GB101 GB1020 GB102 GB1030 GB103 GB1040 GB104 GB GB1060 GB1070 GB1080 GB1090 GB through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use (2) outside poles. Uses screw type clamp terminals. 1 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use (2) outside poles. Uses.190 (4.83) -32 screw type clamp terminals. 480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (480V). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 147 GB201 GB2020 GB202 GB2030 GB203 GB2040 GB204 GB200 GB2060 GB2070 GB2080 GB2090 GB GB301 GB3020 GB302 GB3030 GB303 GB3040 GB304 GB300 GB3060 GB3070 GB3080 GB3090 GB Table -9. Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 277/480V AC Maximum, 277/480V AC Maximum, 277/480V AC Maximum, Ampere V DC Maximum /20V DC Maximum /20V DC 40 C 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Table -10. Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C GHB101 GHB1020 GHB102 GHB1030 GHB103 GHB1040 GHB104 GHB GHB1060 GHB1070 GHB1080 GHB1090 GHB GHB201 GHB2020 GHB202 GHB2030 GHB203 GHB2040 GHB204 GHB200 GHB2060 GHB2070 GHB2080 GHB2090 GHB GHB301 GHB3020 GHB302 GHB3030 GHB303 GHB3040 GHB304 GHB300 GHB3060 GHB3070 GHB3080 GHB3090 GHB3 277V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum 1-Pole HGHB101 HGHB1020 HGHB102 HGHB Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 147 Table -11. Type GQ Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C 277V AC Maximum, No DC 1-Pole 1 20 Contact factory for availability. GQ101 GQ Discount Symbol CB-2

10 -10 1 Amperes G-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0476] Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Technical Data Table -. Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles GHBGFEP 1 14,000 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 277V AC (0/60 Hz) Product Selection Table -13. Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C One-Phase (Requires 2 Poles) 277V AC, 30 ma GHBGFEP101 GHBGFEP1020 GHBGFEP1030 GHBGFEP1040 GHBGFEP GHBGFEP Single-Phase (Requires 2 Poles) Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C193 Product Description 1 60 amperes, 277V, 0/60 Hz Operational voltage 240V to 30V Standards and Certifications These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL489 and UL103.

11 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0477] Types GC, GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers 1 Amperes G-Frame Product Selection Table -14. Type GC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C 240V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum 240V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 240V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum -11 Typical GC Product Description 1 amperes 0, 240, 277, 480Y/277V, 0/60 Hz,, /20V DC 1, 2, and 3 Poles Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: Types GC, 0 and 240V: 1 Pole: Class 11a 2, 3 Poles: Classes 10b, 11b, b, 14b, 1b Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/277V: 1 Pole: Classes c, 13a 2, 3 Poles: Class 13b through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use (2) outside poles. Uses screw type clamp terminals. Table -1. Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C GC101 GC1020 GC102 GC1030 GC103 GC1040 GC104 GC GC1060 GC1070 GC1080 GC1090 GC through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use (2) outside poles. Uses screw type clamp terminals. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 148 GC201 GC2020 GC202 GC2030 GC203 GC2040 GC204 GC200 GC2060 GC2070 GC2080 GC2090 GC GC301 GC3020 GC302 GC3030 GC303 GC3040 GC304 GC300 GC3060 GC3070 GC3080 GC3090 GC Table -16. Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C 277V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum 480Y/277V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole GHC101 GHC1020 GHC102 GHC1030 GHC103 GHC1040 GHC104 GHC GHC1060 GHC1070 GHC1080 GHC1090 GHC GHC201 GHC2020 GHC202 GHC2030 GHC203 GHC2040 GHC204 GHC200 GHC2060 GHC2070 GHC2080 GHC2090 GHC Y/277V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum GHC301 GHC3020 GHC302 GHC3030 GHC303 GHC3040 GHC304 GHC300 GHC3060 GHC3070 GHC3080 GHC3090 GHC3 277V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum 1-Pole HGHC101 HGHC1020 HGHC102 HGHC Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 147

12 - 1 Amperes G-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0478] Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/ Cable-Out 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Product Description 1 60 amperes, 277V, 0/60 Hz Operational voltage 240V to 30V Standards and Certifications These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL489 and UL103. Single-Phase (Requires 2 Pole Spaces) Technical Data and Specifications Table -17. Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type Product Selection of Poles GHCGFEP 1 14,000 Table -18. Type GHCGFEP 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C193 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 277V AC (0/60 Hz) One-Phase (Requires 2 Poles) 277V, 30 ma GHCGFEP101 GHCGFEP1020 GHCGFEP1030 GHCGFEP1040 GHCGFEP GHCGFEP

13 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0479] 1 Amperes G-Frame -13 Special Purpose GC and GHC Circuit Breakers Product Description These are Types GC and GHC circuit breakers with binding head screwtype terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals ( ) will be marked Special purpose breaker not for general use. To order this special breaker, use the from Tables Product Selection Table -19. Type GC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C Use (2) outside poles. 0V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum 240V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole GC102D GC1030D GC103D GC1040D GC104D GCD GC1060D GC1070D GC1080D GC1090D GC1D GC202D GC2030D GC203D GC2040D GC204D GC200D GC2060D GC2070D GC2080D GC2090D GC2D V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum GC302D GC3030D GC303D GC3040D GC304D GC300D GC3060D GC3070D GC3080D GC3090D GC3D Table -20. Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Continuous 40 C V AC Maximum, V DC Maximum Use (2) outside poles. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Y/277V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole GHC102D GHC1030D GHC103D GHC1040D GHC104D GHCD GHC1060D GHC1070D GHC1080D GHC1090D GHC1D GHC202D GHC2030D GHC203D GHC2040D GHC204D GHC200D GHC2060D GHC2070D GHC2080D GHC2090D GHC2D Y/277V AC Maximum, /20V DC Maximum GHC302D GHC3030D GHC303D GHC3040D GHC304D GHC300D GHC3060D GHC3070D GHC3080D GHC3090D GHC3D Table -21. Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications Type Continuous 40 C 277V AC Maximum 1-Pole Cable-In 1 20 Bolt-On 1 20 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 147 GHC101HID GHC1020HID GHB101HID GHB1020HID

14 -14 1 Amperes New E Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0480] Contents Description Page Technical Data and Specifications Product Selection New E Technical Data and Specifications Table -22. UL489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Breaker of Poles Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC Type Y/ I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs EB 1 2, 3, pole E-Frame breakers available Dec DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 ka. EE 2, 3, ES 1 2, 3, 4 EH 1 2, 3, Dimensions/Weights Table -23. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles (2.4).0 (139.7) 2.99 (7.9) (0.8).0 (139.7) 2.99 (7.9) (76.2).0 (139.7) 2.99 (7.9) (101.6).0 (139.7) 2.99 (7.9) Table -24. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type of Poles EB, EE, ES, EH 1. (.68) 2.0 (.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.90 (1.82)

15 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0481] Product Selection Table -2. Main ing System 1 Amperes New E Frame E G H F F G -1 Frame E Standard/Application G = IEC/EC/UL/CSA Performance Y/ B X E S H C D Only DC rated Poles 1 = One 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected = Four Neutral 0% Protected 6 = Four Neutral 60% Protected 7 = Four Neutral % Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0 60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0 % Protected Amps Trip Unit FF = Fixed Fixed AF = Adj. Fixed KS = Molded Case Switch Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mfg. Hardware L = Line/Load Standard Imperial D = Line/Load Standard M = Metric End Caps E = Imperial End Caps N = Line/Load Standard W = No Lugs or End Caps P = Standard Load Only X = Special Terminals Must Use Application to Specify G = Line/Load Standard C = Line/Load Standard Non-Al DIN Rail Metric Imperial No Hardware No Hardware No Hardware Special Hardware Must Use Application to Specify Metric Imperial Cannot be UL rated.

16 -16 1 Amperes New E Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0482] Product Selection Table -26. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 41/480V Max. 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 0% Cont. Fixed Fixed Fixed Adjustable Fixed Adjustable Amps Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal 40 C Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic 18/ / / EGB101FFG EGB1016FFG EGB1020FFG EGB102FFG EGB1030FFG EGB1032FFG EGB103FFG EGB1040FFG EGB104FFG EGBFFG EGB1060FFG EGB1063FFG EGB1070FFG EGB1080FFG EGB1090FFG EGB1FFG EGB1FFG EGE101FFG EGE1016FFG EGE1020FFG EGE102FFG EGE1030FFG EGE1032FFG EGE103FFG EGE1040FFG EGE104FFG EGEFFG EGE1060FFG EGE1063FFG EGE1070FFG EGE1080FFG EGE1090FFG EGE1FFG EGE1FFG EGE1KSG EGS101FFG EGS1016FFG EGS1020FFG EGS102FFG EGS1030FFG EGS1032FFG EGS103FFG EGS1040FFG EGS104FFG EGSFFG EGS1060FFG EGS1063FFG EGS1070FFG EGS1080FFG EGS1090FFG EGS1FFG EGS1FFG EGB201FFG EGB2016FFG EGB2020FFG EGB202FFG EGB2030FFG EGB2032FFG EGB203FFG EGB2040FFG EGB204FFG EGB200FFG EGB2060FFG EGB2063FFG EGB2070FFG EGB2080FFG EGB2090FFG EGB2FFG EGB2FFG EGB2KSG EGE201FFG EGE2016FFG EGE2020FFG EGE202FFG EGE2030FFG EGE2032FFG EGE203FFG EGE2040FFG EGE204FFG EGE200FFG EGE2060FFG EGE2063FFG EGE2070FFG EGE2080FFG EGE2090FFG EGE2FFG EGE2FFG EGE2KSG EGS201FFG EGS2016FFG EGS2020FFG EGS202FFG EGS2030FFG EGS2032FFG EGS203FFG EGS2040FFG EGS204FFG EGS200FFG EGS2060FFG EGS2063FFG EGS2070FFG EGS2080FFG EGS2090FFG EGS2FFG EGS2FFG EGS2KSG ,26. 1, ,90. 1, ,920. 1,920. EGB301FFG EGB3016FFG EGB3020FFG EGB302FFG EGB3030FFG EGB3032FFG EGB303FFG EGB3040FFG EGB304FFG EGB300FFG EGB3060FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3070FFG EGB3080FFG EGB3090FFG EGB3FFG EGB3FFG EGB3KSG EGE301FFG EGE3016FFG EGE3020FFG EGE302FFG EGE3030FFG EGE3032FFG EGE303FFG EGE3040FFG EGE304FFG EGE300FFG EGE3060FFG EGE3063FFG EGE3070FFG EGE3080FFG EGE3090FFG EGE3FFG EGE3FFG EGE3KSG EGS301FFG EGS3016FFG EGS3020FFG EGS302FFG EGS3030FFG EGS3032FFG EGS303FFG EGS3040FFG EGS304FFG EGS300FFG EGS3060FFG EGS3063FFG EGS3070FFG EGS3080FFG EGS3090FFG EGS3FFG EGS3FFG EGS3KSG 2-pole E-Frame breakers available Dec , 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection ,7. 1, ,890. 1, ,210. 2,210. EGB3016AFG EGB302AFG EGB3032AFG EGB3040AFG EGB300AFG EGB3063AFG EGB3080AFG EGB3AFG EGB3AFG EGE3016AFG EGE302AFG EGE3032AFG EGE3040AFG EGE300AFG EGE3063AFG EGE3080AFG EGE3AFG EGE3AFG EGS3016AFG EGS302AFG EGS3032AFG EGS3040AFG EGS300AFG EGS3063AFG EGS3080AFG EGS3AFG EGS3AFG , , ,010. 1,010. 2,280. EGB401FFG EGB4016FFG EGB4020FFG EGB402FFG EGB4030FFG EGB4032FFG EGB403FFG EGB4040FFG EGB404FFG EGB400FFG EGB4060FFG EGB4063FFG EGB4070FFG EGB4080FFG EGB4090FFG EGB4FFG EGB4FFG EGB4KSG EGE401FFG EGE4016FFG EGE4020FFG EGE402FFG EGE4030FFG EGE4032FFG EGE403FFG EGE4040FFG EGE404FFG EGE400FFG EGE4060FFG EGE4063FFG EGE4070FFG EGE4080FFG EGE4090FFG EGE4FFG EGE4FFG EGE4KSG EGS401FFG EGS4016FFG EGS4020FFG EGS402FFG EGS4030FFG EGS4032FFG EGS403FFG EGS4040FFG EGS400FFG EGS4060FFG EGS4063FFG EGS4070FFG EGS4080FFG EGS4090FFG EGS4FFG EGS4FFG EGS4KSG ,130. 2, ,070. 1,070. 1,070. 1,070. 2,0. 2,0. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,17. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 2,98. 2,98. EGB4016AFG EGB402AFG EGB4032AFG EGB4040AFG EGB4063AFG EGB4080AFG EGB4AFG EGB4AFG EGE4016AFG EGE402AFG EGE4032AFG EGE4040AFG EGE4063AFG EGE4080AFG EGE4AFG EGE4AFG EGS4016AFG EGS402AFG EGS4032AFG EGS4040AFG EGS4063AFG EGS4080AFG EGS4AFG EGS4AFG , ,. 1,. 2,630. 1,210. 1,210. 1,210. 1,210. 1,210. 1,36. 1,36. 3,07.

17 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0483] 1 Amperes New E Frame -17 Table -26. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 41/480V (Continued) Max. 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 0% Cont. Fixed Thermal Fixed Thermal Fixed Thermal Adj. Thermal Fixed Thermal Adj. Thermal Amps Fixed Mag. Fixed Mag. Fixed Mag. Fixed Mag. Fixed Mag. Fixed 40 C 70/ EGH101FFG EGH1016FFG EGH1020FFG EGH102FFG EGH1030FFG EGH1032FFG EGH103FFG EGH1040FFG EGH104FFG EGHFFG EGH1060FFG EGH1063FFG EGH1070FFG EGH1080FFG EGH1090FFG EGH1FFG EGH1FFG EGH1KSG ,00. 1,00. EGH201FFG EGH2016FFG EGH2020FFG EGH202FFG EGH2030FFG EGH2032FFG EGH203FFG EGH2040FFG EGH204FFG EGH200FFG EGH2060FFG EGH2063FFG EGH2070FFG EGH2080FFG EGH2090FFG EGH2FFG EGH2FFG EGH2KSG ,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 2,20. 2,20. EGH301FFG EGH3016FFG EGH3020FFG EGH302FFG EGH3030FFG EGH3032FFG EGH303FFG EGH3040FFG EGH304FFG EGH300FFG EGH3060FFG EGH3063FFG EGH3070FFG EGH3080FFG EGH3090FFG EGH3FFG EGH3FFG EGH3KSG 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,10. 1,40. 1,40. 1,40. 1,40. 3,13. 3,13. EGH3016AFG EGH302AFG EGH3032AFG EGH3040AFG EGH300AFG EGH3063AFG EGH3080AFG EGH3AFG EGH3AFG 1,18. 1,18. 1,18. 1,18. 1,18. 1,18. 1,40. 1,40. 3, pole E-Frame breakers available Dec , 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection. EGH401FFG EGH4016FFG EGH4020FFG EGH402FFG EGH4030FFG EGH4032FFG EGH403FFG EGH4040FFG EGH404FFG EGH400FFG EGH4060FFG EGH4063FFG EGH4070FFG EGH4080FFG EGH4090FFG EGH4FFG EGH4FFG EGH4KSG 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,. 1,960. 1,960. 1,960. 1,960. 4,360. 4,360. EGH4016AFG EGH402AFG EGH4032AFG EGH4040AFG EGH400AFG EGH4063AFG EGH4080AFG EGH4AFG EGH4AFG 1,60. 1,60. 1,60. 1,60. 1,60. 1,60. 2,020. 2,020. 4,490.

18 -18 1 Amperes New E Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0484] Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -27. Accessories Description Reference 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) -19 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Multiwire Connectors -187 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Terminal End Covers -191 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Handle Mechanisms -204 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

19 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [048] Amperes F-Frame -19 Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimension/Weights Product Selection F-Frame Product Description All F-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. All circuit breakers 10 through 0 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use. All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical F-Frame Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table -28. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type ED EDH EDC of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 EHD 1 2, 3 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC FDB 2, 3, FD 1 2, 3, 4 HFD 1 2, 3, FDC 2, 3, DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka Table -29. IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s (P1) Circuit Breaker Type ED EDH EDC of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC 220, , FDB 2, 3, FD 1 2, 3, 4 HFD 1 2, 3, FDC 2, 3, DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka

20 Amperes F-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0486] Dimensions/Weights Table -30. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles (3) 2.7 (70) 4. (10). (140) 6 (12) 6 (12) 6 (12) 6 (12) 3.37 (86) 3.37 (86) 3.37 (86) 3.37 (86) Table -31. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type of Poles ED, EDH, EDC 3 (1.361) 4. (2.041) EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 2 (.907) 3 (1.361) 4. (2.041) 6 (2.721) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -32. Circuit Breaker ing System F D C L Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC of Poles 1 = 1 Pole 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Amperes (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only) 200 (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only) 22 (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only) E = % Protected (4-Pole only) Neutral Pole EH = 0% Protected (4-Pole only) K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch L = Line and Load Terminals S = Stainless Steel Terminals V = 0 C Calibration W = Without Terminals Y = Line Terminals Only Z = Aluminum Terminals ( Amperes) E D C L Circuit Breaker Type ED EDH EDC of Poles 2 = 2-Pole 3 = 3-Pole Trip Amperes L W Y Z = Line and Load Terminals = Without Terminals = Line Terminals Only = Aluminum Terminals ( Amperes)

21 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0487] Amperes F-Frame -21 Product Selection Table -33. Types ED, EDH, and EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Maximum Continuous 40 C 240V AC Maximum, V DC (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 6 240V AC 240V AC V AC Type ED Type EDH Type EDC Current Limiting 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole ED2 ED2 ED210 ED217 ED2200 ED ED3 ED3 ED310 ED317 ED3200 ED EDH2 EDH2 EDH210 EDH217 EDH2200 EDH EDH3 EDH3 EDH310 EDH317 EDH3200 EDH322 1,280. 1,280. 1,280. 1,280. 1,280. 1,280. EDC2 EDC2 EDC210 EDC217 EDC2200 EDC222 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, EDC3 EDC3 EDC310 EDC317 EDC3200 EDC322 1,6. 1,6. 1,6. 1,6. 1,6. 1,6. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C101 Table -34. Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C V AC Maximum, V DC 480V AC Maximum, 20V DC V AC V AC Type EHD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole EHD1010 EHD101 EHD1020 EHD102 EHD1030 EHD103 EHD1040 EHD104 EHD EHD1060 EHD1070 EHD1080 EHD1090 EHD1 Not UL listed. kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article (d) EHD2010 EHD201 EHD2020 EHD202 EHD2030 EHD203 EHD2040 EHD204 EHD200 EHD2060 EHD2070 EHD2080 EHD2090 EHD EHD3010 EHD301 EHD3020 EHD302 EHD3030 EHD303 EHD3040 EHD304 EHD300 EHD3060 EHD3070 EHD3080 EHD3090 EHD Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C101

22 Amperes F-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0488] Table -3. Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. 40 C V AC Maximum, 20V DC 277V AC Maximum, V AC Maximum, 20V DC V DC 14 V AC 2 277V AC 2 480V AC Type FDB (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Type FD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole FDB2010 FDB201 FDB2020 FDB202 FDB2030 FDB203 FDB2040 FDB204 FDB200 FDB2060 FDB2070 FDB2080 FDB2090 FDB2 FDB2110 FDB2 FDB ,260. 1,260. 1,260. FDB3010 FDB301 FDB3020 FDB302 FDB3030 FDB303 FDB3040 FDB304 FDB300 FDB3060 FDB3070 FDB3080 FDB3090 FDB3 FDB3110 FDB3 FDB ,6. 1,6. 1,6. FDB4010 FDB401 FDB4020 FDB402 FDB4030 FDB403 FDB4040 FDB404 FDB400 FDB4060 FDB4070 FDB4080 FDB4090 FDB4 FDB4110 FDB4 FDB410 Not UL listed. kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article (d). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C ,110. 1,110. 1,110. 1,110. 1,110. 2,49. 2,49. 2,49. FD1010 FD101 FD1020 FD102 FD1030 FD103 FD1040 FD104 FD FD1060 FD1070 FD1080 FD1090 FD1 FD1110 FD1 FD FD201 FD2020 FD202 FD2030 FD203 FD2040 FD204 FD200 FD2060 FD2070 FD2080 FD2090 FD2 FD2110 FD2 FD210 FD217 FD2200 FD ,91. 1,91. 1,91. 1,920. 1,920. 1,920. FD301 FD3020 FD302 FD3030 FD303 FD3040 FD304 FD300 FD3060 FD3070 FD3080 FD3090 FD3 FD3110 FD3 FD310 FD317 FD3200 FD ,20. 2,20. 2,20. 2,20. 2,20. 2,20. FD401 FD4020 FD402 FD4030 FD403 FD4040 FD404 FD400 FD4060 FD4070 FD4080 FD4090 FD4 FD4110 FD4 FD410 FD417 FD4200 FD422 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,360. 1,49. 1,49. 1,49. 1,49. 3,080. 3,080. 3,080. 3,080. 3,080. 3,080. Table -36. Types HFD and FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. 40 C 277V AC Maximum, V DC V AC Maximum, 20V DC V AC Maximum, 20V DC 6 277V AC 6 480V AC 480V AC Type HFD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Type FDC Current Limiting (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole HFD101 HFD1020 HFD102 HFD1030 HFD103 HFD1040 HFD104 HFD HFD1060 HFD1070 HFD1080 HFD1090 HFD1 HFD1110 HFD1 HFD ,001. 1,001. 1,00. HFD201 HFD2020 HFD202 HFD2030 HFD203 HFD2040 HFD204 HFD200 HFD2060 HFD2070 HFD2080 HFD2090 HFD2 HFD2110 HFD2 HFD210 HFD217 HFD2200 HFD ,130. 1,130. 1,130. 1,130. 2,10. 2,10. 2,10. 2,720. 2,720. 2,720. HFD301 HFD3020 HFD302 HFD3030 HFD303 HFD3040 HFD304 HFD300 HFD3060 HFD3070 HFD3080 HFD3090 HFD3 HFD3110 HFD3 HFD310 HFD317 HFD3200 HFD322 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article (d). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C101 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 1,140. 3,0. 3,0. 3,0. 3,0. 3,0. 3,0. HFD401 HFD4020 HFD402 HFD4030 HFD403 HFD4040 HFD404 HFD400 HFD4060 HFD4070 HFD4080 HFD4090 HFD4 HFD4110 HFD4 HFD410 HFD417 HFD4200 HFD422 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 1,940. 2,44. 2,44. 2,44. 2,44. 4,40. 4,40. 4,40. 4,370. 4,370. 4,370. FDC201 FDC2020 FDC202 FDC2030 FDC203 FDC2040 FDC204 FDC200 FDC2060 FDC2070 FDC2080 FDC2090 FDC2 FDC2110 FDC2 FDC210 FDC217 FDC2200 FDC222 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,32. 1,690. 1,690. 1,690. 1,690. 3,780. 3,780. 3,780. 3,780. 3,780. 3,780. FDC301 FDC3020 FDC302 FDC3030 FDC303 FDC3040 FDC304 FDC300 FDC3060 FDC3070 FDC3080 FDC3090 FDC3 FDC3110 FDC3 FDC310 FDC317 FDC3200 FDC322 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 1,710. 2,09. 2,09. 2,09. 2,09. 4,68. 4,68. 4,68. 4,68. 4,68. 4,68. FDC401 FDC4020 FDC402 FDC4030 FDC403 FDC4040 FDC404 FDC400 FDC4060 FDC4070 FDC4080 FDC4090 FDC4 FDC4110 FDC4 FDC410 FDC417 FDC4200 FDC422 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 2,910. 3,. 3,. 3,. 3,. 6,610. 6,610. 6,610. 6,610. 6,610. 6,610.

23 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0489] Amperes F-Frame -23 Molded Case Switches Molded Case Switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standards UL486A and UL486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only. Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add L to the circuit breaker. When nonstandard or optional line and/or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -37. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole Pole V AC Maximum, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only Note: Molded Case Switches may open above 1800 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C101 Table -38. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes EHD2K EHD3K Terminal Body Material Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EHD) 22 Steel Steel Aluminum Optional Pressure Terminals Aluminum Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum Wire Type AWG Wire Range Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu Cu/AI /0 14 4/ /0 4 4/ kcmil V AC Maximum, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on 3-pole breaker only FD2K FD210K FD222K FD3K FD310K FD322K FD4K FD410K FD422K Metric Wire Range mm Package of 3 Terminals 3T20FB 3TFB 3TA22FD 3TA0FB 3TAFD 3T10FB 3TA22FDK , , , , , ,

24 Amperes F-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0490] Line and Load Terminals (Continued) Screw Collar Nut Collar Clip Conductor Wire Clamp Conductor Washer Screw Conductor Extrusion Figure -1. 3T20FB Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Figure -2. 3TFB, 3T10FB Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Figure -3. 3TA22FD Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. Collar Conductor Washer Screw Conductor Collar Washer Screw Figure -4. 3TA0FB Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Figure -. 3TAFD Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher. Figure -6. 3TA22FDK Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar.

25 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0491] Amperes F-Frame -2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -39. Accessories Description Reference 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) -19 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Keeper Nut -18 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Multiwire Connectors -187 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Terminal End Covers -191 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Cylinder Lock -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Solenoid & Motor) Operators -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 LFD Current Limiter -211 IQ Energy Sentinel -211 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

26 Amperes New J20-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0492] Contents Description Page Technical Data and Specifications Product Selection New J20-Frame New J20 Technical Data and Specifications Table -40. UL489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs J20E 2, 3, J20S 2, 3, J20H 2, 3, DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka. Dimensions/Weights Table -41. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles 2/ (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.7 (90.7) 4.34 (13.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.7 (90.7) Table -42. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker of Poles Type 2/3 4 J20E, J20S, J20H 61.0 (27.7) 81.0 (36.8)

27 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0493] Product Selection Table -43. Main ing System Amperes New J20-Frame J G S 3 O 7 O F A G -27 Frame Standard/Application Poles Amps Trip Unit J G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance E S H C U = One 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected = Four Neutral 0% Protected 6 = Four Neutral 60% Protected 7 = Four Neutral % Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0 60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0 % Protected AA = Adj. Adj. FA = Fixed Adj. KS = Molded Case Switch F3 = 310 Electronic LS Fixed Thermal F2 = 310 Electronic LSI Fixed Thermal F = 310 Electronic LSG Fixed Thermal F6 = 310 Electronic LSIG Fixed Thermal A3 = 310 Electronic LS Adj. Thermal A2 = 310 Electronic LSI Adj. Thermal A = 310 Electronic LSG Adj. Thermal A6 = 310 Electronic LSIG Adj. Thermal T3 = 310 Electronic LS No Plug T2 = 310 Electronic LSI No Plug T = 310 Electronic LSG No Plug T6 = 310 Electronic LSIG No Plug SS = Sealed Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit NN = Frame Only (No Trip) Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mfg. Hardware L = Line/Load Standard Imperial D = Line/Load Standard M = Metric End Caps E = Imperial End Caps N = Line/Load Standard W = No Lugs or End Caps P = Load Standard Lugs X = Special Terminals Must Use Application to Specify G = Line/Load Standard C = Line/Load Standard Non AL DIN Rail Metric Imperial No Hardware No Hardware No Hardware Special Hardware Must Use Application to Specify Metric Imperial Cannot be UL rated. Table -44. Trip Unit ing System J T F A Trip Poles Amps Trip Unit JT 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected = Four Neutral 0% Protected 6 = Four Neutral 60% Protected 7 = Four Neutral % Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0/60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0/% Protected AA = Adj. Adj. FA = Fixed Adj. T3 = 310 Electronic LS No Plug T2 = 310 Electronic LSI No Plug T = 310 Electronic LSG No Plug T6 = 310 Electronic LSIG No Plug KS = Molded Case Switch NA = Magnetic Only Cannot be UL rated.

28 Amperes New J20-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0494] Product Selection Table -4. Components Frame 41/480V Maximum Amperes 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 0% 2/2 20 JGE220NN 390. JGE320NN 2. JGE420NN 1, /3 20 JGS220NN 740. JGS320NN 94. JGS420NN 1, /6 20 JGH220NN 2,87. JGH320NN 3,0. JGH420NN 4,77. Table -46. Components Trip Unit Maximum Amperes 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JT2063FA JT2070FA JT2090FA JT2FA JT2FA JT210FA JT2160FA JT217FA JT2200FA JT222FA JT220FA ,43. JT3063FA JT3070FA JT3090FA JT3FA JT3FA JT310FA JT3160FA JT317FA JT3200FA JT322FA JT320FA ,710. JT3063FAA JT3FAA JT3FAA JT3160FAA JT3200FAA JT320FAA ,76. JT4063FA JT4070FA JT4090FA JT4FA JT4FA JT410FA JT4160FA JT417FA JT4200FA JT422FA JT420FA IEC-EN only. Change the third digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection ,710. JT4063FAA JT4FAA JT4FAA JT4160FAA JT4200FAA JT420FAA ,76. Table -47. Components Line and Load Terminal Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard line and load terminals. Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm 2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 20 Aluminum Cu/Al 4 30 MCM 2 18 TA20J Stainless Steel Cu 4 30 MCM 2 18 T20J 2.

29 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [049] Amperes New J20-Frame -29 Table -48. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 41/480V Maximum Continuous Amperes IEC/CE/UL/CSA 2/ IEC/CE/UL/CSA 40/ IEC/CE/UL/CSA 70/ Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE2070FAG JGE2090FAG JGE2FAG JGE2FAG JGE210FAG JGE217FAG JGE2200FAG JGE222FAG JGE220FAG JGE220KSG JGS2070FAG JGS2090FAG JGS2FAG JGS2FAG JGS210FAG JGS217FAG JGS2200FAG JGS222FAG JGS220FAG JGS220KSG JGH2070FAG JGH2090FAG JGH2FAG JGH2FAG JGH210FAG JGH217FAG JGH2200FAG JGH222FAG JGH220FAG JGH220KSG 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,83. 1,97. 1,97. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,160. 2,32. 2,32. 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 4,460. 4,460. Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE3063FAG JGE3070FAG JGE3090FAG JGE3FAG JGE3FAG JGE310FAG JGE3160FAG JGE317FAG JGE3200FAG JGE322FAG JGE320FAG JGE320KSG JGS3063FAG JGS3070FAG JGS3090FAG JGS3FAG JGS3FAG JGS310FAG JGS3160FAG JGS317FAG JGS3200FAG JGS322FAG JGS320FAG JGS320KSG JGH3063FAG JGH3070FAG JGH3090FAG JGH3FAG JGH3FAG JGH310FAG JGH3160FAG JGH317FAG JGH3200FAG JGH322FAG JGH320FAG JGH320KSG 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,210. 2,38. 2,38. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,60. 2,80. 2,80. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 3,770. 4,91. 4,91. Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE3063AAG JGE3AAG JGE3AAG JGE3160AAG JGE3200AAG JGE320AAG JGS3063AAG JGS3AAG JGS3AAG JGS3160AAG JGS3200AAG JGS320AAG JGH3063AAG JGH3AAG JGH3AAG JGH3160AAG JGH3200AAG JGH320AAG 2,280. 2,280. 2,280. 2,280. 2,280. 2,460. 2,68. 2,68. 2,68. 2,68. 2,68. 2,890. 3,88. 3,88. 3,88. 3,88. 3,88.,06. IEC-EN only. Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection. Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE4063FAG JGE4070FAG JGE4090FAG JGE4FAG JGE4FAG JGE410FAG JGE4160FAG JGE417FAG JGE4200FAG JGE422FAG JGE420FAG JGE420KSG JGS4063FAG JGS4070FAG JGS4090FAG JGS4FAG JGS4FAG JGS410FAG JGS4160FAG JGS417FAG JGS4200FAG JGS422FAG JGS420FAG JGS420KSG JGH4063FAG JGH4070FAG JGH4090FAG JGH4FAG JGH4FAG JGH410FAG JGH4160FAG JGH417FAG JGH4200FAG JGH422FAG JGH420FAG JGH420KSG 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 2,98. 3,220. 3,220. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,20. 3,790. 3,790.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090.,090. 6,63. 6,63. Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE4063AAG JGE4AAG JGE4AAG JGE4160AAG JGE4200AAG JGE420AAG JGS4063AAG JGS4AAG JGS4AAG JGS4160AAG JGS4200AAG JGS420AAG JGH4063AAG JGH4AAG JGH4AAG JGH4160AAG JGH4200AAG JGH420AAG 3,07. 3,07. 3,07. 3,07. 3,07. 3,320. 3,62. 3,62. 3,62. 3,62. 3,62. 3,90.,24.,24.,24.,24.,24. 6,83.

30 -30 1 Amperes New J20-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0496] Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -49. Accessories Description Reference 2-, 3-Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Plug Nut -186 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Multiwire Connectors -187 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Cylinder Lock -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical Operator -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 IQ Energy Sentinel -211 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

31 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0497] Amperes J-Frame -31 Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection J-Frame Product Description All J-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. J-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical J-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table -0. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type JDB JD HJD JDC of Poles 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka. 8 milliseconds time constant. Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC Table -1. IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type JD HJD JDC of Poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka

32 Amperes J-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0498] Dimensions/Weights Table -2. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 2, (10). (140) 10 (2) 10 (24) (103) (103) Table -3. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles JDB JD HJD JDC 11.2 (.103) 11.2 (.103) 11.2 (.103).2 (.7). (.670). (.670). (.670) 13. (6.4) 13.2 (6.010) 13.2 (6.010) 14.2 (6.470) 9 (4.082) 9 (4.082) 10 (4.36) 10 (4.36) 10 (4.36) 11 (4.990) 10. (4.763) 10. (4.763) 11. (.217) 2 (.907) 2 (.907) 2 (.907) 2 (.907) 2 (.907) 2 (.907) 2.2 (1.021) 2.2 (1.021) 2.2 (1.021) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -4. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System J D F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere C = Non-aluminum Terminals F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C Calibration W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Table -. Trip Unit ing System J T T Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-Magnetic of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere T = Trip Unit Thermal-Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only)

33 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0499] Amperes J-Frame -33 Product Selection Table -6. Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. 40 C 2-Pole Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals JD2070 JD2090 JD2 JD2 JD210 JD217 JD2200 JD222 JD220 JD3070 JD3090 JD3 JD3 JD310 JD317 JD3200 JD322 JD320 JD4 JD410 JD417 JD4200 JD422 JD420 2, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HJD2070 HJD2090 HJD2 HJD2 HJD210 HJD217 HJD2200 HJD222 HJD220 HJD3070 HJD3090 HJD3 HJD3 HJD310 HJD317 HJD3200 HJD322 HJD320 HJD4 HJD410 HJD417 HJD4200 HJD422 HJD420 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 3,00 4, , , , , , , , , ,91.00,0.00,0.00,0.00,0.00,0.00 6, Individually packed. Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. Neutral is in right pole. Magnetic trip adjustable 10 times continuous ampere rating. Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals JDC2070 JDC2090 JDC2 JDC2 JDC210 JDC217 JDC2200 JDC222 JDC220 JDC3070 JDC3090 JDC3 JDC3 JDC310 JDC317 JDC3200 JDC322 JDC320 JDC4 JDC410 JDC417 JDC4200 JDC422 JDC420 3, , , , , , , ,97.00, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,60.00 Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames JT2070T JT2090T JT2T JT2T JT210T JT217T JT2200T JT222T JT220T JT3070T JT3090T JT3T JT3T JT310T JT317T JT3200T JT322T JT320T JT3T JT310T JT317T JT3200T JT322T JT320T , , , Standard Terminals Only See Page -3 for Optional Terminals TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB Table -7. Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC 2-Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC JD220F HJD220F 2,6.00 JDC220F 3, Pole JD320F HJD320F 3, JDC320F 4, Pole JD420F 2,30.00 HJD420F 4, JDC420F 6, Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 for Breaker; 29C603 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit

34 Amperes J-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [000] Table -8. Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole V AC Rated, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals JDB2070W JDB2090W JDB2W JDB2W JDB210W JDB217W JDB2200W JDB222W JDB220W JDB3070W JDB3090W JDB3W JDB3W JDB310W JDB317W JDB3200W JDB322W JDB320W 2, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,6.00 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C103 for Breaker With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only JDB2070 JDB2090 JDB2 JDB2 JDB210 JDB217 JDB2200 JDB222 JDB220 JDB3070 JDB3090 JDB3 JDB3 JDB310 JDB317 JDB3200 JDB322 JDB320 2, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,80.00 Molded Case Switches Molded Case Switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components Table -9. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole V AC Maximum, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals Suitable for Reverse Feed Use 20 JD220KW HJD220KW 3-Pole 20 JD320KW HJD320KW 4-Pole 20 JD420KW HJD420KW 1, , , ,0.00 2, , Individually packed. Note: Molded case switches may open above 200 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C103 and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL JDB220KW HJDB220KW JDB320KW HJDB320KW JDB420KW HJDB420KW 1, , , ,0.00 2, , Standard Terminals Only See Page -3 for Optional Terminals TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB

35 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [001] Amperes J-Frame -3 Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL486A and UL486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 6, or Electrical Bulletin 116. Unless otherwise specified, J-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA20KB terminal contains a recess which is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor. Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -60. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Figure -7. T20KB Terminal Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm 2 20 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 30 kcmil 2 18 TA20KB Optional Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 20 Stainless Steel Cu 4 30 kcmil 2 18 T20KB Slotted Screw T20KB Terminal Collar Nut Collar Slotted Screw TA20KB Terminal Figure -8. TA20KB Terminal (Standard)

36 Amperes J-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [002] Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -61. Accessories Description Reference Page 2-, 3-Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Plug Nut -186 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Multiwire Connectors -187 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Cylinder Lock -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Solenoid) Operator -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 IQ Energy Sentinel -211 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

37 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [003] Amperes K-Frame -37 Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection K-Frame Product Description All K-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. K-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table -62. NEMA/UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD of Poles 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60Hz) Volts DC pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka Table -63. IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD KDC of Poles 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60Hz) Volts DC pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 ka

38 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [004] K-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -64. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame K K K Ampere Range 400A 400A 400A 480V 3, 6, (ka) 3, 6, (ka) 3, 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I 2t Seconds Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I 2t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 300 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I 2t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. Zone interlock kit. With Separate ground fault alarm unit. BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

39 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [00] Amperes K-Frame -39 Dimensions/Weights Table -6. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 4. (140) (183) 10. (27) 10. (27) (103) (103) Table -66. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD KDC Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles (4.36) 10 (4.36) 10 (4.36) 10 (4.36) 10 (4.36) 11. (.216) 11. (.216) 11. (.216) 11. (.216) 11. (.216) 7. (3.402) 7. (3.402) 7. (3.402) 8. (3.86) 8. (3.86) 8. (3.86) 1. (.680) 1. (.680) 1. (.680) Weights shown are for thermal magnetic trip units. 3-pole electronic trip units weigh 2. lbs. (1.134 kg). 1. (.680) 1. (.680) 1. (.680)

40 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [006] Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -67. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System K D F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KDB KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere C = Copper Terminals E = 0% Protected Neutral Pole (4-Pole Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Only) F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal- Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Table -68. Trip Unit ing System K T T No Indicates Standard Load and Lineside Terminals Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-Magnetic KES = Electronic of Poles 2 = 2-Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere LS LSI = Electronic Trip Unit Adjustable Short Time Delay with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp = Electronic Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay LSG = Electronic Trip Unit Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection LSIG = Electronic Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection V E T = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) = 0% Protected Neutral Pole (4-Pole Electronic Trip Unit Only) Terminals Only = Trip Unit Only Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only. Table -69. OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System K D T 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD of Poles 3 = 3 Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Trip Model T = Model 0 T10 = Model Trip Type 2 = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA W = Without Terminals

41 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [007] Amperes K-Frame -41 Product Selection Table -70. Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals KD2 KD2 KD210 KD217 KD2200 KD222 KD220 KD2300 KD230 KD2400 KD3 KD3 KD310 KD317 KD3200 KD322 KD320 KD3300 KD330 KD3400 KD4 KD4 KD410 KD417 KD4200 KD422 KD420 KD4300 KD430 KD4400 2, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,76.00 High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HKD2 HKD2 HKD210 HKD217 HKD2200 HKD222 HKD220 HKD2300 HKD230 HKD2400 HKD3 HKD3 HKD310 HKD317 HKD3200 HKD322 HKD320 HKD3300 HKD330 HKD3400 HKD4 HKD4 HKD410 HKD417 HKD4200 HKD422 HKD420 HKD4300 HKD430 HKD4400 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00 4,4.00,060.00,060.00,060.00,060.00,060.00,040.00,060.00,060.00,060.00, , , , , , , , , , , Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals KDC2 KDC2 KDC210 KDC217 KDC2200 KDC222 KDC220 KDC2300 KDC230 KDC2400 KDC3 KDC3 KDC310 KDC317 KDC3200 KDC322 KDC320 KDC3300 KDC330 KDC3400 KDC4 KDC4 KDC410 KDC417 KDC4200 KDC422 KDC420 KDC4300 KDC430 KDC4400,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00,420.00, , , , , , , , , , , ,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 9,0.00 Individually packed. 2TA400K, 3TA400K, and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Magnetic trip adjustable 10 times continuous ampere rating. Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames KT2T KT2T KT210T KT217T KT2200T KT222T KT220T KT2300T KT230T KT2400T KT3T KT3T KT310T KT317T KT3200T KT322T KT320T KT3300T KT330T KT3400T KT3T KT3T KT310T KT317T KT3200T KT322T KT320T KT3300T KT330T KT3400T Standard Terminals Only See Page -0 for Optional Terminals TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 2TA400K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 3TA400K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 4TA400K Table -71. Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC 2-Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC KD2400F 1, HKD2400F 3, KDC2400F 4, Pole KD3400F 2,21.00 HKD3400F 4, KDC3400F, Pole KD4400F 3,96.00 HKD4400F 6, KDC4400F 8, Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 for Breaker; 29C603 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit

42 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [008] Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table -72. Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip 310 Plug Only Standard Cont. Standard Options Ampere Fixed Adjustable Terminals Ampere Plug 40 C Plug 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3LS KES3LSI KES3LSG KES3LSIG KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES320LS KES320LSI KES320LSG KES320LSIG KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG Pole KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4LS KES4LSI KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES420LS KES420LSI KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI See Table -73 on Page -43 for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For AC use only. 3-pole KES Trip Units are for use in 3-pole frames only. Individually packed. 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding 3-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 0% rated protection on neutral pole, add E to 4-pole trip unit. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for Electronic Trip Unit 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KEST 2KEST 2KES10T 2KES160T 2KES17T 2KES200T 2KES22T 2KES20T 4KES200T 4KES22T 4KES20T 4KES300T 4KES30T 4KES400T 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KEST 2KES070T 2KEST 2KEST 2KES10T 2KES160T 2KES17T 2KES200T 2KES22T 2KES20T 4KES200T 4KES22T 4KES20T 4KES300T 4KES30T 4KES400T Ampere 70/90// A1KEST1 /10/200/20 A2KES20T1 200/20/300/400 A4KES400T1 70/90// A1KEST1 /10/200/20 A2KES20T1 200/20/300/400 A4KES400T1 See Page -0 for Optional Terminals TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K 3TA400K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 4TA400K

43 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [009] Amperes K-Frame -43 Product Selection Table -73. Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units s A1KEST1 A2KES20T1 A4KES400T1 HKD3400F HKD4400F KDC3400F KDC4400F KD3400F KD4400F KES3LS KES3LSG KES3LSI KES3LSIG KES320LS KES320LSG , ,260.00, , , , , , , , KES320LSI KES320LSIG KES3400LS KES3400LSG KES3400LSI KES3400LSIG KES4LS KES4LSI KES420LS KES420LSI KES4400LS KES4400LSI TA300K TA30K 1KES070T 1,8.00 2, , , ,8.00 2, ,1.00 2, ,1.00 2, ,1.00 2, KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KEST 2KES070T 2KEST 2KEST 2KES10T 2KES160T 2KES17T 2KES200T 2KES22T 2KES20T 3TA400K 4KES200T KES22T 4KES20T 4KES300T 4KES30T 4KES400T 4TA400K

44 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [010] Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application. Table -74. Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole V AC Rated, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals DK220W DK2300W DK230W DK2400W DK320W DK3300W DK330W DK3400W 1,93. 1,93. 1,93. 1,93. 2,310. 2,310. 2,310. 2,310. With Line Terminals Only DK220Y DK2300Y DK230Y DK2400Y DK320Y DK3300Y DK330Y DK3400Y 1,97. 1,97. 1,97. 1,97. 2,37. 2,37. 2,37. 2,37. With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only DK220 DK2300 DK230 DK2400 DK320 DK3300 DK330 DK3400 2,020. 2,020. 2,020. 2,020. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. V AC Rated, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals KDB2W KDB2W KDB210W KDB217W KDB2200W KDB222W KDB220W KDB2300W KDB230W KDB2400W KDB3W KDB3W KDB310W KDB317W KDB3200W KDB322W KDB320W KDB3300W KDB330W KDB3400W 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,3. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. 2,830. With Standard Line and Load Terminals KDB2 KDB2 KDB210 KDB217 KDB2200 KDB222 KDB220 KDB2300 KDB230 KDB2400 KDB3 KDB3 KDB310 KDB317 KDB3200 KDB322 KDB320 KDB3300 KDB330 KDB3400 2,43. 2,300. 2,300. 2,300. 2,300. 2,43. 2,300. 2,40. 2,40. 2,40. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. 2,980. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 Molded Case Switches Molded Case Switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Table -7. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C 240V AC Maximum, 20V DC 2-Pole 400 DK2400K 3-Pole 400 DK3400K 4-Pole 400 Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals 1,910. 2,24. Vac Maximum, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals KD2400K HKD2400K KD3400K HKD3400K KD4400K HKD4400K Note: Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 2,310. 3,92. 2,800. 4,70. 4,10. 7,670. V AC Maximum, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use KDB2400K HKDB2400K KDB3400K HKDB3400K KDB4400K HKDB4400K 2,310. 3,92. 2,800. 4,70. 4,10. 7,670.

45 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [011] Amperes K-Frame -4 % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Table -76. % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers Max. Cont. 40 C 3-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip 310 Plug Only Standard Standard Options Ampere Adjustable Terminals Plug Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 3 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity 6 480V AC Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection See Table -77 below for prices. Individually packed. 3TA400K terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for KES Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Fixed Plug CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3LS KES3LSI KES3LSG KES3LSIG CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES320LS KES320LSI KES320LSG KES320LSIG CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KEST 2KEST 2KEST 2KES10T 2KES160T 2KES17T 2KES200T 2KES22T 2KES20T 4KES200T 4KES22T 4KES20T 4KES300T 4KES30T 4KES400T Ampere 70/90// A1KEST1 /10/200/22 A2KES20T1 200/20/300/400 A4KES400T1 See Page -0 for Optional Terminals TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 3TA400K Table -77. % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers s A1KEST1 A2KES20T1 A4KES400T1 CHKD3400F CKD3400F KES3LS KES3LSG KES3LSI KES3LSIG KES320LS , , , , , KES320LSG KES320LSI KES320LSIG KES3400LS KES3400LSG KES3400LSI KES3400LSIG TA300K TA30K 1KES070T 2, ,8.00 2, , , ,8.00 2, KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KEST 2KEST 2KEST 2KES10T 2KES160T 2KES17T KES200T 2KES22T 2KES20T 3TA400K 4KES200T 4KES22T 4KES20T 4KES300T 4KES30T 4KES400T

46 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0] Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -78. Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) ➀ S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 Discount Symbol CB-2 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC KD3T2W 4,22. KD3T6W 4,790. KD3T7W 4, KD320T2W 4,28. KD320T6W,640. KD320T7W, KD3400T2W 4,28. KD3400T6W,640. KD3400T7W, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC HKD3T2W,630. HKD3T6W 6,440. HKD3T7W, HKD320T2W 6,40. HKD320T6W 7,890. HKD320T7W 7, HKD3400T2W 6,40. HKD3400T6W 7,890. HKD3400T7W 7, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC KDC3T2W 7,230. KDC3T6W 8,040. KDC3T7W 7, KDC320T2W 8,140. KDC320T6W 9,490. KDC320T7W 8, KDC3400T2W 8,140. KDC3400T6W 9,490. KDC3400T7W 8, ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400

47 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [013] Amperes K-Frame -47 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -79. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) ➀ S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) Ampere Fixed Plug I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC KD3T106W,748. KD3T107W, KD320T106W 6,768. KD320T107W 6, KD3400T106W 6,768. KD3400T107W 6, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC HKD3T106W 7,728. HKD3T107W 6, HKD320T106W 9,468. HKD320T107W 8, HKD3400T106W 9,468. HKD3400T107W 8, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC KDC3T106W 9,648. KDC3T107W 9, KDC320T106W 11,390. KDC320T107W 10, KDC3400T106W 11,390. KDC3400T107W 10, Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400

48 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [014] % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -80. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC CKD3T2W 3,90. CKD3T6W 4,71. CKD3T7W 4, CKD320T2W 4,81. CKD320T6W 6,160. CKD320T7W, CKD3400T2W 4,81. CKD3400T6W 6,160. CKD3400T7W, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC CHKD3T2W 6,110. CHKD3T6W 6,930. CHKD3T7W 6, CHKD320T2W 7,020. CHKD320T6W 8,380. CHKD320T7W 7, CHKD3400T2W 7,020. CHKD3400T6W 8,380. CHKD3400T7W 7, ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400

49 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [01] Amperes K-Frame -49 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -81. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC CKD3T106W,660. CKD3T107W, CKD320T106W 7,390. CKD320T107W 6, CKD3400T106W 7,390. CKD3400T107W 6, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC CHKD3T106W 8,310. CHKD3T107W 7, CHKD320T106W 10,060. CHKD320T107W 9, CHKD3400T106W 10,060. CHKD3400T107W 9, Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C104 Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400 ORPKA70 ORPKA90 ORPKA ORPKA110 ORPKA ORPK02A ORPK02A10 ORPK02A17 ORPK02A200 ORPK02A22 ORPK02A20 ORPK40A200 ORPK40A22 ORPK40A20 ORPK40A300 ORPK40A30 ORPK40A400

50 Amperes K-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [016] Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL486A and UL486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 6, or Electrical Bulletin 116. Unless otherwise specified, K-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -82. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Wire Type Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors 3 30/(1) 20 00/(1) 3/0 20/(2) Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Cu Cu Cu Cu/AI Cu/AI 3 30/(1) 20 00/(1) 3/0 20/(2) 2/0 20/(2) or 2/0 00/(1) 00 70/(1) Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers. 2-Pole Kit. 3-Pole Kit. 4-Pole Kit. Metric Wire Terminal Figure Terminals with Range mm 2 Control Wire Termination TA300K TA30K 2TA400K 3TA400K 4TA400K T300K T30K 2T400K 3T400K 4T400K 2TA401K 3TA401K 4TA401K 2TA402K 3TA402K 4TA402K TA400KCW 3TA400KCW 4TA400KCW 2T400KCW 3T400KCW 4T400KCW 2TA401KCW 3TA401KCW 4TA401KCW Figure Figure -9. TA401K Figure -10. TA400K, T400K Figure -11. TA30K, T30K Figure -. TA300K, T300K Figure -13. T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW Figure -14. TA402K

51 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [017] Amperes K-Frame -1 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -83. Accessories Description Reference 2-Pole➀ 3-Pole 4-Pole Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) -162 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 PowerNet or Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 0) -184 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Keeper Nut -18 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Terminal Adapter -186 Multiwire Connectors -187 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Cylinder Lock -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Solenoid) Operator -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 IQ Energy Sentinel -211 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit -211 OPTIM System Components 3-Poles Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -2 Digitrip OPTIMizer -2 Auxiliary Power Module -2 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both 2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units.

52 -2 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [018] Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection L-Frame Product Description All L-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table -84. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC LDB LD CLD HLD CHLD 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 LDC 2, 3, 4 CLDC 2, 3, Utilization category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only. % rated breakers Table -8. IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs LDB LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, Utilization category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only. % rated breakers

53 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [019] Amperes L-Frame -3 L-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -86. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame L L L Ampere Range 300 A 200 A 200 A 480V 3, 6, (ka) 3, 6, (ka) 3, 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I 2t Seconds Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 T No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I 2t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 300 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I 2t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. Zone interlock kit. BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

54 -4 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [020] Dimensions/Weights Table -87. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 2, (210) 11 (279) 10.7 (274) 10.7 (274) (103) (103) Table -88. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles LD, HLD, LDC LDB 18 (8.172) 18 (8.172) 20 (9.080) 20 (9.080) 2 (11.340) 2 (11.340) 14 (6.36) 1 (6.810) 20 (9.072) 3 (1.361) 4 (1.814) (2.268)

55 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [021] Amperes L-Frame - Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -89. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System L D F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere C = Copper Terminals F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Table -90. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit ing System L T T Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal Magnetic of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere T = Trip Unit Thermal-Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) Table -91. OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System L D T 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles 3 = 3 Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere (Available on Model only) 20 (Available on Model only) Trip Type 2 = LSI (0 Only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Trip Model T = Model 0 T10 = Model W = Without Terminals 400 Table -92. Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit ing System L E S L S P Trip Unit Type LES = Electronic of Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit Ampere LS LSI LSG LSIG P = % Protected Neutral on 4-Pole Trip Unit

56 -6 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [022] Product Selection Table -93. Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals LD2300 LD230 LD2400 LD240 LD200 LD2 LD3300 LD330 LD3400 LD340 LD300 LD3 LD4300 LD430 LD4400 LD440 LD400 LD4 3, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,48.00 High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HLD2300 HLD230 HLD2400 HLD240 HLD200 HLD2 HLD3300 HLD330 HLD3400 HLD340 HLD300 HLD3 HLD4300 HLD430 HLD4400 HLD440 HLD400 HLD4,890.00,890.00,890.00,890.00,890.00, , , , , , , , , , , , ,83.00 Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Neutral is in right pole. Magnetic trip range 10 times continuous ampere rating. Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals LDC2300 LDC230 LDC2400 LDC240 LDC200 LDC2 LDC3300 LDC330 LDC3400 LDC340 LDC300 LDC3 LDC4300 LDC430 LDC4400 LDC440 LDC400 LDC4 7, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames LT2300T LT230T LT2400T LT240T LT200T LT2T LT3300T LT330T LT3400T LT340T LT300T LT3T LT4300T LT430T LT4400T LT440T LT400T LT4T 1, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Standard Terminals Only See Page -66 for Optional Terminals TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 2TA603LDK TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 3TA603LDK TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 4TA603LDK Table -94. Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC 2-Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC LD2F 2,3.00 HLD2F 4,0.00 LDC2F 6, Pole LD3F 3,0.00 HLD3F, LDC3F 7, Pole LD4F 4,2.00 HLD4F 7, LDC4F 10, Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C607 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit Discount Symbol CB-2

57 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [023] Amperes L-Frame -7 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table -9. Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Cont. L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Ampere Fixed Adjustable Terminals Ampere Plug) Plug 40 C Plug 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I 2 t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) See Table -96 below for prices. Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Neutral is in right pole. For AC use only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C61 for LES Trip Unit I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LD3F HLD3F LDC3F LES3LS LES3LSI LES3LSG LES3LSIG Pole LD4F HLD4F LDC4F LES4LS LES4LSI LES300T 6LES30T 6LES400T 6LES00T 6LEST 6LES300T 6LES30T 6LES400T 6LES00T 6LEST Ampere 300/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 300/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 See Page -66 for Optional Terminals TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 3TA603LDK TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 4TA603LDK Table -96. Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units s A6LEST1 HLD3F HLD4F LDC3F LDC4F , , , , LD3F LD4F LES3LS LES3LSG LES3LSI 3,0.00 4,2.00 2, , , LES3LSIG LES4LS LES4LSI TA602LD 3TA603LDK, , , TA603LDK 6LES300T 6LES30T 6LES400T 6LES00T LEST 00 Discount Symbol CB-2

58 -8 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [024] % Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug and Terminals. Table -97. % Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. 40 C 3-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC Standard Options Ampere Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection See Table -98 below for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. Individually packed. 3TA603LDK terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Fixed Plug CLD3F CHLD3F CLDC3F LES3LS LES3LSI LES3LSG LES3LSIG LES300T 6LES30T 6LES400T 6LES00T 6LEST Adjustable Plug Ampere 300/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 Standard Terminals Only See Page -66 for Optional Terminals TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 3TA603LDK Table -98. % Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units s A6LEST1 CHLD3F CLDC3F CLD3F LES3LS , , , , LES3LSG LES3LSI LES3LSIG TA602LD 3TA603LDK 4, ,490.00, LES300T 6LES30T 6LES400T 6LES00T 6LEST

59 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [02] Amperes L-Frame -9 Table -99. Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere 2-Pole Pole V AC Rated, 20V DC Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals LDB2300W LDB230W LDB2400W LDB240W LDB200W LDB2W LDB3300W LDB330W LDB3400W LDB340W LDB300W LDB3W 3,81. 3,81. 3,81. 3,81. 3,81. 3,81. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only LDB2300 LDB230 LDB2400 LDB240 LDB200 LDB2 LDB3300 LDB330 LDB3400 LDB340 LDB300 LDB3 Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker 3,940. 3,940. 3,940. 3,940. 3,940. 3,940. 4,990. 4,990. 4,990. 4,990. 4,990. 4,990. Molded Case Switches Molded Case Switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Table -. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole V AC Maximum, 20V DC Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals LD2WK 3,690. LDB2WK 3,690. LD3WK 4,2. LDB3WK 4,2. LD4WK 7,240. LDB4WK 7,240. Standard Terminals Only See Page -66 for Optional Terminals 2TA603LDK 2TA603LDK 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDK 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDK Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. Note: Molded Case Switch may trip above 0 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Molded Case Switch Discount Symbol CB-2

60 -60 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [026] Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC 400 LD3400T2W 6,830. LD3400T6W 8,960. LD3400T7W 8, LD3T2W 7,340. LD3T6W 9,630. LD3T7W 8, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC HLD3400T2W 9,00. HLD3400T6W 11,10. HLD3400T7W 10, HLD3T2W 9,840. HLD3T6W,130. HLD3T7W 10, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC 400 LDC3400T2W 10,780. LDC3400T6W,890. LDC3400T7W 11, LDC3T2W 11,720. LDC3T6W 14,000. LDC3T7W, ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-2

61 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [027] Amperes L-Frame -61 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC LD3T106W 9,60. LD3T107W 8, LD320T106W 9,60. LD320T107W 8, LD3400T106W 10,440. LD3400T107W 9, LD3T106W 11,30. LD3T107W 10, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC HLD3T106W,10. HLD3T107W 10, HLD320T106W,10. HLD320T107W 10, HLD3400T106W 13,10. HLD3400T107W 11, HLD3T106W 14,290. HLD3T107W, Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit. LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A

62 -62 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [028] Table -102 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC LDC3T106W 14,030. LDC3T107W, LDC320T106W 14,030. LDC320T107W, LDC3400T106W 1,190. LDC3400T107W 13, LDC3T106W 16,10. LDC3T107W 14, Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A

63 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [029] Amperes L-Frame -63 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC 400 CLD3400T2W 8,010. CLD3400T6W 10,110. CLD3400T7W 9, CLD3T2W 8,710. CLD3T6W 11,000. CLD3T7W 9, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 400 CHLD3400T2W 10,240. CHLD3400T6W,340. CHLD3400T7W 11, CHLD3T2W 11,140. CHLD3T6W 13,420. CHLD3T7W, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC 400 CLDC3400T2W,000. CLDC3400T6W 14,0. CLDC3400T7W, CLDC3T2W 13,040. CLDC3T6W 1,340. CLDC3T7W 13, ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A

64 -64 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [030] Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous 40 C Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 3 480V AC CLD3T106W 11,020. CLD3T107W 9, CLD320T106W 11,020. CLD320T107W 9, CLD3400T106W 11,920. CLD3400T107W 10, CLD3T106W,90. CLD3T107W 11, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC CHLD3T106W 13,40. CHLD3T107W, CHLD320T106W 13,40. CHLD320T107W, CHLD3400T106W 14,0. CHLD3400T107W 13, CHLD3T106W 1,820. CHLD3T107W 14, Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPLA07 ORPLA09 ORPLA10 ORPLA11 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A1 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A20 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A

65 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [031] Amperes L-Frame -6 Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting V AC Rated 480V AC CLDC3T106W 1,360. CLDC3T107W 13, CLDC320T106W 1,360. CLDC320T107W 13, CLDC3400T106W 16,630. CLDC3400T107W 14, CLDC3T106W 18,070. CLDC3T107W 16, Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C10 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPLA070 ORPLA090 ORPLA ORPLA110 ORPLA ORPL02A ORPL02A10 ORPL02A17 ORPL02A200 ORPL02A22 ORPL02A20 ORPL40A200 ORPL40A22 ORPL40A20 ORPL40A300 ORPL40A30 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A300 ORPL60A30 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A

66 -66 Amperes L-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [032] Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL486A and UL486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 6M. Unless otherwise specified, L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two pan-head, slotted screws and lockwashers which can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws which are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker. Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -10. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Individually packed. Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Terminal Terminals with Range mm 2 Control Wire Termination Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI 4/0 (1) 4 4/0 (2) 3/0 30 (2) (2) TA401LDK 2-Pole Kit 3TA401LDK 3-Pole Kit 4TA401LDK 4-Pole Kit TA40LD TA602LD 2TA603LDK 2-Pole Kit 3TA603LDK 3-Pole Kit 4TA603LDK 4-Pole Kit TA602LDKCW 2TA603LDKCW 3TA603LDKCW 4TA603LDKCW Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper Cu (2) 0 20 T602LD TA401LD or TA603LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.) Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers TA40LD or TA602LD or T602LD Terminal Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws) Terminal Cover Warning Label Retainer Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover Screws Figure -1. Terminals

67 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [033] Amperes L-Frame -67 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table Accessories Description Reference Page Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 0) -184 External Accessories End Cap Kit -18 Control Wire Terminal Kit -186 Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Motor) Operator -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit -211 OPTIM System Components 3-Poles Ground Fault Alarm Unit -211 Potential Transformer Module -211 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -2 Digitrip OPTIMizer -2 Auxiliary Power Module -2 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both 2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Cutler-Hammer for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. OPTIM model is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. 2-Pole, 3-Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

68 Amperes M-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [034] Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection M-Frame Product Description All M-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. M-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC Utilization category A circuit breakers. 2-pole or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at 22 ka Table IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Interrupting Capacity RMS Symmetrical Amperes (ka) I CU = I CS Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Volts DC Utilization category A circuit breakers. 2-pole or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at 22 ka

69 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [03] Amperes M-Frame -69 MDL-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 RMS Sensing Yes Breaker Type Frame MDL, CMDL, HMDL, CHMDL Ampere Range A 480V 0, 6 (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) Long Delay Time I 2 t Seconds Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Short Delay Time I 2 t ms No Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 300 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame Ground Fault Delay I 2 T No No Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Magnitude of Trip Information No No Remote Signal Contacts Ground Alarm Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital Display No No Current No No Power and Energy No No Power Quality Harmonics No No Power Factor No No Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Testing Testing Method Test Set Adjust by rating plug. I n = Plug

70 Amperes M-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [036] Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 2, (210) (406) (103) Table Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) Thermal-magnetic only. Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles (.0) 29 (13.2) 30 (13.6) 24. (11.1) 26 (11.8) 26 (11.8) 2. (1.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table - Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System M D L F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL HMDL of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Thermal-magnetic only. Table Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit ing System M T T Trip Unit Type MT MES of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles Trip Unit /Plug Ampere T V = Thermal Magnetic = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) LS = Digitrip RMS 310 LSI = Digitrip RMS 310 LSG = Digitrip RMS 310 LSIG = Digitrip RMS 310 Thermal-magnetic only.

71 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [037] Amperes M-Frame -71 Product Selection Table Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page -74 for Optional Terminals 2-Pole Pole MDL2300 MDL230 MDL2400 MDL240 MDL200 MDL2 MDL2700 MDL2800 MDL3300 MDL330 MDL3400 MDL340 MDL300 MDL3 MDL3700 MDL3800,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00, ,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 MDL2800F MDL3800F Two terminals are required per pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 for Breaker 2, HMDL2300 HMDL230 HMDL2400 HMDL240 HMDL200 HMDL2 HMDL2700 HMDL2800 3,66.00 HMDL3300 HMDL330 HMDL3400 HMDL340 HMDL300 HMDL3 HMDL3700 HMDL3800 7, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , HMDL2800F HMDL3800F Magnetic Trip Range is 10 up through A; 4 8 on 700 and 800A x Continuous Ampere, MT2300T MT230T MT2400T MT240T MT200T MT2T MT2700T MT2800T,90.00 MT3300T MT330T MT3400T MT340T MT300T MT3T MT3700T MT3800T U.S.$ 2, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA2 U.S.$ Table -11. Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 2-Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals MDLB2300 MDLB230 MDLB2400 MDLB240 MDLB200 MDLB2 MDLB2700 MDLB2800 MDLB3300 MDLB330 MDLB3400 MDLB340 MDLB300 MDLB3 MDLB3700 MDLB3800 Factory sealed for reverse feed application. Two terminals are required per pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 for Breaker,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00,290.00, ,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6,0.00 6, High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HMDLB2300 HMDLB230 HMDLB2400 HMDLB240 HMDLB200 HMDLB2 HMDLB2700 HMDLB2800 HMDLB3300 HMDLB330 HMDLB3400 HMDLB340 HMDLB300 HMDLB3 HMDLB3700 HMDLB3800 7, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Standard Terminals Only See Page -74 for Optional Terminals TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA

72 Amperes M-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [038] Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C 3-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For AC use only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 for Breaker; 29C61 for MES Trip Unit Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Terminals Unit Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I 2 t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) 800 MDL3800F 3,66. HMDL3800F,90. MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG 3,23. 4,68.,0. 7,010. Ampere Fixed Plug 8MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 8MES700T 8MES800T Adjustable Plugs Ampere 400/00//800 A8MES800T 168. See Page -74 for Standard and Optional Terminals

73 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [039] Amperes M-Frame -73 Table Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit LS LSI LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 for Breaker; 29C61 for MES Trip Unit % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug and terminals. 800 MDLB3800T33W 6,900. MDLB3800T32W 8,30. MDLB3800T3W 9,210. MDLB3800T36W 10, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 800 HMDLB3800T33W 8,810. HMDLB3800T32W 10,260. HMDLB3800T3W 11,0. HMDLB3800T36W,80. Table % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Terminals Continuous Standard Options Ampere Fixed Adjustable Ampere 40 C Plug 3-Pole Standard Inter-rupting Capacity 0 480V AC High Interrupting Capacity 6 480V AC Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection See Table -119 below for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For AC use only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 for Breaker; 29C61 for MES Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection 800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 8MES700T 8MES800T Ampere 400/00// 800 A8MES800T See Page -74 for Standard and Optional Terminals Table % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s A8MES800T CHMDL3800F CMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSG ,360. 4,620. 3,23.,0. MES3800LSI MES3800LSIG 8MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 4,68. 7, MES700T 8MES800T

74 Amperes M-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [040] Molded Case Switches Molded Case Switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Table -0. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous 40 C V AC Maximum, 20V DC Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals 2-Pole 800 MDL2800WK MDLB2800WK HMDL2800WK 3-Pole 800 MDL3800WK MDLB3800WK HMDL3800WK 4, , ,360.00,870.00, , MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reversefeed applications. Note: Molded case switch may trip above 0 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C111 Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -1. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Figure -16. TA700MA1 Wire Type Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors (2) 1 00 kcmil (3) 3/0 400 kcmil (2) kcmil Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 800 Copper Copper Cu Cu (2) 2/0 00 kcmil (3) 3/0 300 kcmil Terminal TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA TMA1 T800MA Figure -18. TA801MA Terminals with Control Wire Termination TA700MA1CWT TA800MA2CWT TA801MACWT Figure -17. TA800MA2

75 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [041] Amperes M-Frame -7 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -2. Accessories Reference 2-Pole 3-Pole Page Left Right Left Center Right Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -188 Terminal Shields -190 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Motor) Operator -197 Plug-In Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit -211 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both 2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.

76 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [042] Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection N-Frame Product Description All N-Frame Circuit Breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated. Typical N-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table -3. UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) ND 2, 3, 4 CND 2, 3, 4 HND 2, 3, 4 CHND 2, 3, 4 NDC 2, 3, 4 CNDC 2, 3, Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % rated breakers Table -4. IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) ND I cu I cs CND I cu I cs HND I cu I cs CHND I cu I cs NDC I cu I cs CNDC I cu 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, I cs Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % rated breakers

77 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [043] Amperes N-Frame -77 N-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame N N N Ampere Range 400A 00A 400A 00A 400A 00A 480V 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I 2 t Seconds Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No No x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I 2 t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 300 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20 % x (I s ) 20 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I 2 t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. Zone interlock kit. BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

78 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [044] Dimensions/Weights Table -6. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 2, (210) 11. (283) 16 (407) 16 (407). (140). (140) Table -7. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker of Poles ND, HND, NDC 37 (16.8) 4 (20.4) 8 (26.3) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -8. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System N D T 3 2 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC CND CHND CNDC of Poles 2 = 2 Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere 800 = 800 Amperes = 00 Amperes Trip Model T3 = Model 310 T = Model 0 T7 = Model 70 T10 = Model Trip Type 2 = LSI 3 = LS = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA E = % R.P. protected (4-Pole) EH = 0% R.P. protected (4-Pole) K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch W = Without Terminals X = Load Only Terminals Y = Line Only Terminals

79 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [04] Amperes N-Frame -79 Product Selection Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -9. Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Terminals Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Adjustable Short Independently Adjustable Short Independently Page -9 Time Pickup Adjustable Time Pickup Adjustable Short for Optional with I 2 t Short Short Time with I 2 t Short Time Pickup and Terminals Delay Ramp Pickup and Delay and Delay and Delay Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Protection 2-Pole 800 ND2800T33W ND2800T32W ND2800T3W ND2800T36W Pole 800 ND3800T33W ND3800T32W ND3800T3W ND3800T36W Pole 800 ND4800T33W ND4800T32W Pole 00 ND2T33W ND2T32W ND2T3W ND2T36W Pole 00 ND3T33W ND3T32W ND3T3W ND3T36W Pole 00 ND4T33W ND4T32W See Table -130 on Page -80 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

80 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [046] Table Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 ND2T32W ND2T33W ND2T3W ND2T36W ND2800T32W ND2800T33W ND2800T3W ND2800T36W , , , , , , , ,10.00 ND3T32W ND3T33W ND3T3W ND3T36W ND3800T32W ND3800T33W ND3800T3W ND3800T36W ND4T32W ND4T33W, , , , , , , , , , ND4800T32W ND4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 13, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

81 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [047] Amperes N-Frame -81 Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Terminals Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Page -9 for Optional Terminals Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection 2-Pole 800 HND2800T33W HND2800T32W HND2800T3W HND2800T36W Pole 800 HND3800T33W HND3800T32W HND3800T3W HND3800T36W Pole 800 HND4800T33W HND4800T32W Pole 00 HND2T33W HND2T32W HND2T3W HND2T36W Pole 00 HND3T33W HND3T32W HND3T3W HND3T36W Pole 00 HND4T33W HND4T32W See Table -132 on Page -82 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

82 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [048] Table Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 HND2T32W HND2T33W HND2T3W HND2T36W HND2800T32W HND2800T33W HND2800T3W HND2800T36W , , , , , , , , HND3T32W HND3T33W HND3T3W HND3T36W HND3800T32W HND3800T33W HND3800T3W HND3800T36W HND4T32W HND4T33W 13, , , , ,00 8, ,190.00, , , HND4800T32W HND4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 16, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

83 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [049] Amperes N-Frame -83 Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC Terminals Only Ampere 2-Pole 800 NDC2800T33W NDC2800T32W NDC2800T3W NDC2800T36W Pole 800 NDC3800T33W NDC3800T32W NDC3800T3W NDC3800T36W Pole 800 NDC4800T33W NDC4800T32W Pole 00 NDC2T33W NDC2T32W NDC2T3W NDC2T36W Pole 00 NDC3T33W NDC3T32W NDC3T3W NDC3T36W Pole 00 NDC4T33W NDC4T32W See Table -134 on Page -84 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 Fixed Plugs Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 See Page -9 for Optional Terminals TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

84 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [00] Table Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 NDC2T32W NDC2T33W NDC2T3W NDC2T36W NDC2800T32W NDC2800T33W NDC2800T3W NDC2800T36W ,900.00, , , , , ,010.00,00.00 NDC3T32W NDC3T33W NDC3T3W NDC3T36W NDC3800T32W NDC3800T33W NDC3800T3W NDC3800T36W NDC4T32W NDC4T33W 1, , , , , , , , , , NDC4800T32W NDC4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 17, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

85 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [01] Amperes N-Frame -8 % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -13. % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Terminals Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Page -9 for Optional Terminals Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection 2-Pole 800 CND2800T33W CND2800T32W CND2800T3W CND2800T36W Pole 800 CND3800T33W CND3800T32W CND3800T3W CND3800T36W Pole 800 CND4800T33W CND4800T32W Pole 00 CND2T33W CND2T32W CND2T3W CND2T36W Pole 00 CND3T33W CND3T32W CND3T3W CND3T36W Pole 00 CND4T33W CND4T32W See Table -136 on Page -86 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

86 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [02] Table % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 CND2T32W CND2T33W CND2T3W CND2T36W CND2800T32W CND2800T33W CND2800T3W CND2800T36W , ,.00 14, , , , ,00 11,40.00 CND3T32W CND3T33W CND3T3W CND3T36W CND3800T32W CND2800T33W CND2800T3W CND2800T36W CND4T32W CND4T33W 14,370.00, , , , , ,340.00, , ,.00 CND4800T32W CND4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 16, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

87 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [03] Amperes N-Frame -87 % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Terminals Only Ampere 2-Pole 800 CHND2800T33W CHND2800T32W CHND2800T3W CHND2800T36W Pole 800 CHND3800T33W CHND3800T32W CHND3800T3W CHND3800T36W Pole 800 CHND4800T33W CHND4800T32W Pole 00 CHND2T33W CHND2T32W CHND2T3W CHND2T36W Pole 00 CHND3T33W CHND3T32W CHND3T3W CHND3T36W Pole 00 CHND4T33W CHND4T32W See Table -138 on Page -88 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 Fixed Plugs Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 See Page -9 for Optional Terminals TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

88 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [04] Table % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 CHND2T32W CHND2T33W CHND2T3W CHND2T36W CHND2800T32W CHND2800T33W CHND2800T3W CHND2800T36W , ,.00 1, , , , ,090.00,80.00 CHND3T32W CHND3T33W CHND3T3W CHND3T36W CHND3800T32W CHND3800T33W CHND3800T3W CHND3800T36W CHND4T32W CHND4T33W 16, , , ,60.00, , ,.00 14, , , CHND4800T32W CHND4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 19, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

89 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0] Amperes N-Frame -89 % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous 40 C Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Standard Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC Terminals Only Ampere 2-Pole 800 CNDC2800T33W CNDC2800T32W CNDC2800T3W CNDC2800T36W Pole 800 CNDC3800T33W CNDC3800T32W CNDC3800T3W CNDC3800T36W Pole 800 CNDC4800T33W CNDC4800T32W Pole 00 CNDC2T33W CNDC2T32W CNDC2T3W CNDC2T36W Pole 00 CNDC3T33W CNDC3T32W CNDC3T3W CNDC3T36W Pole 00 CNDC4T33W CNDC4T32W See Table -140 on Page -90 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 Fixed Plugs Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I 2 t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T NES900T NES0T NES00T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 00 ANES00T1 See Page -9 for Optional Terminals TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1

90 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [06] Table % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units s ANES00T1 A8NES800T1 CNDC2T32W CNDC2T33W CNDC2T3W CNDC2T36W CNDC2800T32W CNDC2800T33W CNDC2800T3W CNDC2800T36W , , , , , ,60.00, , CNDC3T32W CNDC3T33W CNDC3T3W CNDC3T36W CNDC3800T32W CNDC3800T33W CNDC3800T3W CNDC3800T36W CNDC4T32W CNDC4T33W 21, , , , , , , , , , CNDC4800T32W CNDC4800T33W TA0NB1 TA00NB1 NES0T NES00T NEST NES700T NES800T 20, , NES900T 8NES400T 8NES40T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T

91 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [07] Amperes N-Frame -91 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC 800 ND3800T2W 9,10. ND3800T6W,210. ND3800T7W 11, ND3T2W 13,110. ND3T6W 1,810. ND3T7W 14, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 800 HND3800T2W 11,090. HND3800T6W 13,790. HND3800T7W, HND3T2W 14,480. HND3T6W 17,180. HND3T7W 1, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 800 NDC3800T2W 11,920. NDC3800T6W 14,620. NDC3800T7W 13, NDC3T2W 16,620. NDC3T6W 19,320. NDC3T7W 17, ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0

92 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [08] Table Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere 800 ND3800T106W 14,290. ND3800T107W, ND3T106W 18,640. ND3T107W 16, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 800 HND3800T106W 16,260. HND3800T107W 14, HND3T106W 20,240. HND3T107W 18, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 800 NDC3800T106W 17,230. NDC3800T107W 1, NDC3T106W 22,760. NDC3T107W 21, Fixed Plug ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0

93 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [09] Amperes N-Frame -93 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding es ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (Refer to Page -184 and take list price x 1.2). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC 800 CND3800T2W 11,240. CND3800T6W 13,90. CND3800T7W, CND3T2W 1,620. CND3T6W 18,330. CND3T7W 16, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 800 CHND3800T2W 13,170. CHND3800T6W 1,870. CHND3800T7W 14, CHND3T2W 17,480. CHND3T6W 20,180. CHND3T7W 18, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 800 CNDC3800T2W 14, CNDC3800T6W 16,900. CNDC3800T7W 1, CNDC3T2W 23,490. CNDC3T6W 26,270. CNDC3T7W 23, ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0

94 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [060] Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I 2 t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 0 480V AC Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere 800 CND3800T106W 16,430. CND3800T107W 14, CND3T106W 21,. CND3T107W 19, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 800 CHND3800T106W 18,700. CHND3800T107W 16, CHND3T106W 23,790. CNHD3T107W 21, Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 800 CNDC3800T106W 19,910. CNDC3800T107W 17, CNDC3T106W 30,960. CNDC3T107W 27, Fixed Plug ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A40 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPNA ORPNA700 ORPNA800 ORPNA ORPNA0

95 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [061] Amperes N-Frame -9 Type ND Molded Case Switches Table -14. Type ND Molded Case Switches Continuous 40 C Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 800 Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 00 Neutral is in right pole. Note: Molded case switch may trip above 14,000 amperes. 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole ND3800WK HND3800WK ND3WK HND3WK 6, , , , ND4800WK HND4800WK ND4WK HND4WK 10,390.00, , , For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum 0 Aluminum 00 Aluminum 00 Aluminum Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Terminal rating is AL9CU. Terminal rating is AL7CU. Copper Copper Copper Wire Type Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu Cu Cu AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors (2) 1 00 kcmil (3) 3/0 400 kcmil (4) 4/0 00 kcmil (3) kcmil (2) 2/0 00 kcmil (3) 3/0 00 kcmil (4) 3/0 400 kcmil Metric Wire Range mm TA0NB1 TA00NB1 TA01NB1 T700NB1 T0NB1 T00NB Figure -19. Figure -20. TA0NB1 Figure -21. TA00NB1 Figure -22. TA01NB1 Figure -23. T700NB1 Figure -24. T0NB1

96 Amperes N-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [062] Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table Accessories Description Reference Page 3-Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 0) -184 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -188 Interphase Barriers -191 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -193 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -196 Electrical (Motor) Operator -197 Plug-in Adapters -199 Rear Connecting Studs -200 Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit -211 OPTIM System Components 3-Poles Ground Fault Alarm Unit -211 Potential Transformer Module -211 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -2 Digitrip OPTIMizer -2 Auxiliary Power Module -2 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both OPTIM is factory sealed and does not have the right pole available for accessories.

97 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [063] Amperes R-Frame -97 Contents Description Page Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions/Weights Product Selection R-Frame Product Description R-Frame Circuit Breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals. All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. Typical R-Frame Circuit Breaker Technical Data and Specifications Table UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) RD 3, CRD 3, RDC 3, CRDC 3, Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % Rated breakers. Note: See Page -98 for Trip Unit Specifications. Table IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (0/60 Hz) RD I cu I cs 3, 4 13 RDC 3, 4 I cu 200 I cs Utilization Category A circuit breakers

98 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [064] R-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -10. Specifications Trip Unit Type Adjust by rating plug. Except 200 ampere frame is 200 %. Varies by frame. LS/LSG only. Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip RMS 610 Not to exceed 00 amperes. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Optional. Add suffix R to. BIM = Breaker Interface Module Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame R R R R R R Ampere Range 800A-200A 800A 200A 800A 200A 800A 200A 800A 200A 800A 200A 480V 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSI(A), LISG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No No No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I 2 t Seconds Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds 2 24 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No No No No No 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No No 0.8 x I r 0.8 x I r 0.8 x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % % 200 % 200 % 200 % 200 % % x (I r ) x (I n ) x (I n ) S1&S2 x (I r ) S1&S2 x (I r ) S1&S2 x (I r ) S1&S2 x (I r ) Short Delay Time I 2 t ms No 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 300 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Selective Interlocking Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % 200 % 200 % 200 % 200 % % x (I n ) x (I n ) M1&M2 x (I n ) M1&M2 x (I n ) M1&M2 x (I n ) M1&M2 x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No No No No No 2 % x (I n ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 2 % x (I s ) 2-% x (I s ) 2 % x (I s ) 2 % x (I s ) 2 % x (I n ) Ground Fault Delay I 2 T No No 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Selective Interlocking Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Signal Contacts Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital Display No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Current No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Voltage No No No No No Yes No Power and Energy No No No No Yes Yes Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No No No Yes Yes Power Factor No No No No Yes (Over Yes Yes Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Only) Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n

99 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [06] Amperes R-Frame -99 Dimensions/Weights Table -11. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 3 1. (394) 16 (406) 9.7 (248) 4 20 (08) 16 (406) 9.7 (248) Table -12. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type 1A Complete Breaker of Poles 3 4 RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC 102 (46.3) 13 (61.2) 2000A RD, RDC 102 (46.3) 13 (61.2) CRD, CRDC 130 (9.0) 17 (79.4) 200A RD, RDC 13 (61.2) 182 (82.6) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -13. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System R D T 3 2 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD CRDC of Poles 3 = 3 Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere 16 = 1A 20 = 2000A 2 = 200A Trip Type T32 = Digitrip RMS 310 LSI T3 = Digitrip RMS 10 LS T6 = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG T86 = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG T96 = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG T106 = Digitrip OPTIM LSIG T107 = Digitrip OPTIM LSIA W = Without Terminals P = % Protected Neutral Pole R = Ground Fault Remote (310 Only) K = Molded Case Switch For complete list of available trip types refer to Pages

100 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [066] Product Selection Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -14. Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I 2 t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Ampere 1 RD316T33W RD316T32W RD316T3W RD316T36W RD320T33W RD320T32W RD320T3W RD320T36W RD32T33W RD32T32W RD32T3W RD32T36W Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 RD416T33W RD416T32W RD420T33W RD420T32W RD42T33W RD42T32W Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T See Table -1 on Page -101 for prices. For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame. Unprotected right pole neutral. Add P to for % protected right pole neutral, i.e., RD416T33PW. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e. RD316T3RW. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Adjustable Settings are: 00, 1, 2000, 200 A2RES2T1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Adjustable Settings are: 00, 1, 2000, 200 A2RES2T1

101 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [067] Amperes R-Frame -101 Table -1. Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s A16RES16T1 A20RES20T1 A2RES2T1 RD316T32W RD316T33W RD316T3W RD316T36W RD320T32W RD320T33W RD320T3W ,,700. 1, ,680. 1, , ,630. RD320T36W RD32T32W RD32T33W RD32T3W RD32T36W RD416T32W RD416T33W RD420T32W RD420T33W RD42T32W 18,0. 23, , , , , ,330. 2, , , RD42T33W 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 3, REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T

102 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [068] Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -16. Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I 2 t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG See Table -17 below for prices. For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame. Unprotected right pole neutral. Add P to for % protected right pole neutral, i.e., RDC416T33PW. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e. RDC316T3RW. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Ampere 3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T33W RDC316T32W RDC316T3W RDC316T36W RDC320T33W RDC320T32W RDC320T3W RDC320T36W RDC32T33W RDC32T32W RDC32T3W RDC32T36W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC416T33W RDC416T32W RDC420T33W RDC420T32W RDC42T33W RDC42T32W Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Adjustable Settings are: 00, 1, 2000, 200 A2RES2T1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Adjustable Settings are: 00, 1, 2000, 200 A2RES2T1 Table -17. Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s A16RES16T1 A20RES20T1 A2RES2T1 RDC316T32W RDC316T33W RDC316T3W RDC316T36W RDC320T32W RDC320T33W RDC320T3W ,80. 13, ,90. 17, ,490. 1, ,280. RDC320T36W RDC32T32W RDC32T33W RDC32T3W RDC32T36W RDC416T32W RDC416T33W RDC420T32W RDC420T33W RDC42T32W 18,30. 26, , , ,80. 23, ,370. 2,670. 2, ,040. RDC42T33W 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 29,60. 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 2REST 2REST 2RES16T 2RES20T 2RES2T

103 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [069] Amperes R-Frame -103 % Rated Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -18. % Rated Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I 2 t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC See Table -19 below for prices. Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Refer to FRED for dimensions. For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e. CRD316T33RW. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit Digitrip RMS 310 Plug Only Ampere 1 CRD316T33W CRD316T32W CRD316T3W CRD316T36W CRD320T33W CRD320T32W CRD320T3W CRD320T36W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T33W CRDC316T32W CRDC316T3W CRDC316T36W CRDC320T33W CRDC320T32W CRDC320T3W CRDC320T36W Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T 16RES08T 16RES10T 16REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 00, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 00, 1, 2000 A20RES20T1 Table -19. % Rated Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers s A16RES16T1 A20RES20T1 CRDC316T32W CRDC316T33W CRDC316T3W CRDC316T36W CRDC320T32W CRDC320T33W CRDC320T3W CRDC320T36W , , , , , , , ,940. CRD316T32W CRD316T33W CRD316T3W CRD316T36W CRD320T32W CRD320T33W CRD320T3W CRD320T36W 16RES08T 16RES10T 19, , , ,70. 20, , , , REST 16REST 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 20RES10T 20REST 20REST 20RES14T 20RES16T 20RES20T

104 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [070] Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 RD316T1W RD316T3W RD316T2W RD316T4W RD316TW RD316T6W RD320T1W RD320T3W RD320T2W RD320T4W RD320TW RD320T6W RD32T1W RD32T3W RD32T2W RD32T4W RD32TW RD32T6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T1W RDC316T3W RDC316T2W RDC316T4W RDC316TW RDC316T6W RDC320T1W RDC320T3W RDC320T2W RDC320T4W RDC320TW RDC320T6W RDC32T1W RDC32T3W RDC32T2W RDC32T4W RDC32TW RDC32T6W See Table -161 below for prices. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C88 for Digitrip 10 Trip Unit Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 Table Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s RDC316T1W RDC316T2W RDC316T3W RDC316T4W RDC316TW RDC316T6W RDC320T1W RDC320T2W RDC320T3W RDC320T4W 17,70. 19, ,0. 20, ,00. 22, , ,40. 19,60. 22,010. RDC320TW RDC320T6W RDC32T1W RDC32T2W RDC32T3W RDC32T4W RDC32TW RDC32T6W RD316T1W RD316T2W 22,40. 24,20. 2,70. 27,. 26,0. 28, ,. 30,090. 1, ,070. RD316T3W RD316T4W RD316TW RD316T6W RD320T1W RD320T2W RD320T3W RD320T4W RD320TW RD320T6W 16, , , , , , , ,10. 20,60. 22,300. RD32T1W RD32T2W RD32T3W RD32T4W RD32TW RD32T6W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 23,260. 2,0. 23, ,60. 26, ,. RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20

105 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [071] Amperes R-Frame -10 % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 CRD316T1W CRD316T3W CRD316T2W CRD316T4W CRD316TW CRD316T6W CRD320T1W CRD320T3W CRD320T2W CRD320T4W CRD320TW CRD320T6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T3W CRDC316T2W CRDC316T4W CRDC316TW CRDC316T6W CRDC320T1W CRDC320T3W CRDC320T2W CRDC320T4W CRDC320TW CRDC320T6W Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 See Table -163 below for prices. Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C88 for Digitrip 10 Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers s CRDC316T2W CRDC316T3W CRDC316T4W CRDC316TW CRDC316T6W CRDC320T1W CRDC320T2W CRDC320T3W CRDC320T4W CRDC320TW 23, , , ,80. 26, , ,80. 23,700. 2, ,360. CRDC320T6W CRD316T1W CRD316T2W CRD316T3W CRD316T4W CRD316TW CRD316T6W CRD320T1W CRD320T2W CRD320T3W 28, , , ,60. 21,70. 22, , , , ,130. CRD320T4W CRD320TW CRD320T6W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 23, ,00. 2,810. RP6R20A200

106 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [072] Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC See Table -16 below for prices. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) 1 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T62W RD316T64W RD316T6W RD316T66W RD320T61W RD320T63W RD320T62W RD320T64W RD320T6W RD320T6W RD32T61W RD32T63W RD32T62W RD32T64W RD32T64W RD32T66W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T62W RDC316T64W RDC316T6W RDC316T66W RDC320T61W RDC320T63W RDC320T62W RDC320T64W RDC320T6W RDC320T66W RDC32T61W RDC32T63W RDC32T62W RDC32T64W RDC32T6W RDC32T66W Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 Table -16. Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s RDC316T61W RDC316T62W RDC316T63W RDC316T64W RDC316T6W RDC316T66W RDC320T61W RDC320T62W RDC320T63W RDC320T64W 1, ,340. 1, , , , , ,30. 18, ,390. RDC320T6W RDC320T66W RDC32T61W RDC32T62W RDC32T63W RDC32T64W RDC32T6W RDC32T66W RD316T61W RD316T62W 20, , , ,80. 27, , , , , ,680. RD316T63W RD316T64W RD316T6W RD316T66W RD320T61W RD320T62W RD320T63W RD320T64W RD320T6W RD320T6W 1, , , , ,20. 18,0. 16, , , ,. RD32T61W RD32T62W RD32T63W RD32T64W RD32T64W RD32T66W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 24,00. 26, , , , ,80. RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20

107 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [073] Amperes R-Frame -107 % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T62W CRD316T64W CRD316T6W CRD316T66W CRD320T61W CRD320T63W CRD320T62W CRD320T64W CRD320T6W CRD320T66W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T6W CRDC316T66W CRDC320T61W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T64W CRDC320T6W CRDC320T66W Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 See Table -167 below for prices. Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers s CRDC316T61W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T6W CRDC316T66W CRDC320T61W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T64W 21, , , ,30. 24, , ,40. 23, ,490. 2,930. CRDC320T6W CRDC320T66W CRD316T61W CRD316T62W CRD316T63W CRD316T64W CRD316T6W CRD316T66W CRD320T61W CRD320T62W 26, , , ,70. 20, , ,70. 24, , ,190. CRD320T63W CRD320T64W CRD320T6W CRD320T66W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 21, , ,170. 2,670. RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200

108 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [074] Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T82W RD316T84W RD316T8W RD316T86W RD320T81W RD320T83W RD320T82W RD320T84W RD320T8W RD320T86W RD32T81W RD32T83W RD32T82W RD32T84W RD32T8W RD32T86W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T82W RDC316T84W RDC316T8W RDC316T86W RDC320T81W RDC320T83W RDC320T82W RDC320T84W RDC320T8W RDC320T86W RDC32T81W RDC32T83W RDC32T82W RDC32T84W RDC32T8W RDC32T86W Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 See Table -169 below for prices. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED Table Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s RDC316T81W RDC316T82W RDC316T83W RDC316T84W RDC316T8W RDC316T86W RDC320T81W RDC320T82W RDC320T83W RDC320T84W 19, 21, ,70. 21, , ,0. 21, ,20. 22, ,0. RDC320T8W RDC320T86W RDC32T81W RDC32T82W RDC32T83W RDC32T84W RDC32T8W RDC32T86W RD316T81W RD316T82W 24, , , ,70. 31, , 33,70. 3, ,40. 20,410. RD316T83W RD316T84W RD316T8W RD316T86W RD320T81W RD320T82W RD320T83W RD320T84W RD320T8W RD320T86W 18, , , 22, , ,80. 20,30. 22, , ,330. RD32T81W RD32T82W RD32T83W RD32T84W RD32T8W RD32T86W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 28, , ,. 30, , ,70. RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20

109 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [07] Amperes R-Frame -109 % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T82W CRD316T84W CRD316T8W CRD316T86W CRD320T81W CRD320T83W CRD320T82W CRD320T84W CRD320T8W CRD320T86W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T8W CRDC316T86W CRDC320T81W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T84W CRDC320T8W CRDC320T86W Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 See Table -171 below for prices. Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers s CRDC316T81W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T8W CRDC316T86W CRDC320T81W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T84W 2,90. 27,460. 2, , ,40. 29, , ,0. 28, ,660. CRDC320T8W CRDC320T86W CRD316T81W CRD316T82W CRD316T83W CRD316T84W CRD316T8W CRD316T86W CRD320T81W CRD320T82W 30, ,10. 23,620. 2, , ,. 26, ,970. 2, ,910. CRD320T83W CRD320T84W CRD320T8W CRD320T86W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 2, ,30. 27, ,390. RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200

110 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [076] Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T92W RD316T94W RD316T9W RD316T96W RD320T91W RD320T93W RD320T92W RD320T94W RD320T9W RD320T96W RD32T91W RD32T93W RD32T92W RD32T94W RD32T9W RD32T96W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T92W RDC316T94W RDC316T9W RDC316T96W RDC320T91W RDC320T93W RDC320T92W RDC320T94W RDC320T9W RDC320T96W RDC32T91W RDC32T93W RDC32T92W RDC32T94W RDC32T9W RDC32T96W See Table -173 below for prices. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20 Table Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s RDC316T91W RDC316T92W RDC316T93W RDC316T94W RDC316T9W RDC316T96W RDC320T91W RDC320T92W RDC320T93W RDC320T94W 20, , , , , , , , ,20. 2,360. RDC320T9W RDC320T96W RDC32T91W RDC32T92W RDC32T93W RDC32T94W RDC32T9W RDC32T96W RD316T91W RD316T92W 2, , ,90. 33, , , , , , ,60. RD316T93W RD316T94W RD316T9W RD316T96W RD320T91W RD320T92W RD320T93W RD320T94W RD320T9W RD320T96W 20, , ,60. 24, , , ,90. 23, ,080. 2,70. RD32T91W RD32T92W RD32T93W RD32T94W RD32T9W RD32T96W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 29, , , ,90. 32, ,820. RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R2A160 RP6R2A200 RP6R2A20

111 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [077] Amperes R-Frame -111 % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T92W CRD316T94W CRD316T9W CRD316T96W CRD320T91W CRD320T93W CRD320T92W CRD320T94W CRD320T9W CRD320T96W Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T9W CRDC316T96W CRDC320T91W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T94W CRDC320T9W CRDC320T96W Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200 See Table -17 below for prices. Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED Table -17. % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers s CRDC316T91W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T9W CRDC316T96W CRDC320T91W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T94W 26, , , , , , , , , ,900. CRDC320T9W CRDC320T96W CRD316T91W CRD316T92W CRD316T93W CRD316T94W CRD316T9W CRD316T96W CRD320T91W CRD320T92W 31, , , ,720. 2, ,30. 27, , , ,10. CRD320T93W CRD320T94W CRD320T9W CRD320T96W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A0 RP6R16A160 RP6R20A RP6R20A0 26, , , ,630. RP6R20A160 RP6R20A200

112 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [078] Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I Ampere r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous 40 C G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LSIA LSIG Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere 3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 48V AC 1 RD316T107W 21,760. RD316T106W 24, RD320T107W 23,130. RD320T106W 2, RD32T107W 30,960. RD32T106W 33, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 RDC316T107W 22,380. RDC316T106W 24, RDC320T107W 24,700. RDC320T106W 27, RDC32T107W 33,320. RDC32T106W 3, Fixed Plug ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A0 ORPR16A160 ORPR20A ORPR20A0 ORPR20A160 ORPR20A200 ORPR2A160 ORPR2A200 ORPR2A20 ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A0 ORPR16A160 ORPR20A ORPR20A0 ORPR20A160 ORPR20A200 ORPR2A160 ORPR2A200 ORPR2A20 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

113 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [079] Amperes R-Frame -113 % Rated Volt AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table % Rated Volt AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2 t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I 2 t or Flat Response) LSIA LSIG Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C107 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit; DS29170R for Dimensions/FRED Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 6 480V AC 1 CRD316T107W 26,80. CRD316T106W 28, CRD320T107W 27,940. CRD320T106W 30, Pole High Interrupting Capacity V AC Rated 480V AC 1 CRDC316T107W 28,460. CRDC316T106W 30, CRDC320T107W 28,0. CRDC320T106W 31, ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A0 ORPR16A160 ORPR20A ORPR20A0 ORPR20A160 ORPR20A200 ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A0 ORPR16A160 ORPR20A ORPR20A0 ORPR20A160 ORPR20A200

114 Amperes R-Frame January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [080] Molded Case Switches For UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Table Molded Case Switches Cont. 40 C Complete without Terminals 3-Pole 4-Pole Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 1 RD316WK 1,710. RD416WK 1,710. Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 2000 RD320WK 16,010. RD420WK 2,. Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 200 Note: Molded case switch may trip above 17,00 amperes. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C106 for Molded Case Switch Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Terminals Rear Connectors Terminal Body Material Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Wire Type Cu/AI Cu Cu/AI Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm 2 includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of 3-pole breaker. For use with % rated 1A and 2000A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Is included in breaker carton when % rated device is ordered. For use with 200A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 200A breaker is ordered. Breaker Line/Load Conductors English English English English English English 00 0 (4) 1 (4) 2 (6) TA1RD TA1RD TA2000RD B2016RD B2016RDL B200RD , Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL486A and UL486B and CSA C22.2 No. 6M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Ordering Information R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Figure -2. Mounting Hardware Figure -26. Mounting Hardware

115 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [081] Amperes R-Frame -11 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table Accessories Description Reference 3-Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -19 Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) -19 Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) -162 Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) -162 Shunt Trip Standard -168 Shunt Trip Low Energy -173 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -174 Accessory Terminal Block -183 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -188 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -194 Key Interlock Kit -19 Walking Beam Interlock -196 Electrical (Motor) Operator -197 Drawout Cassette -189 Handle Mechanisms -204 Handle Extension -210 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit (310 Only) -211 OPTIM System Components Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -2 Digitrip OPTIMizer -2 Auxiliary Power Module -2 Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position Accessory available/modification available Mounts outside breaker. Included with breaker.

116 -116 Motor Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [082] Contents Description Page Motor Circuit Protectors Product Description Product Selection Motor Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors Product Description Designated as the Cutler-Hammer Types GMCP, HMCPE and HMCP, the instantaneous-only Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3A to 00A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No..1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No..1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 17-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking. Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with. See FRED 278.

117 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [083] Motor Circuit Protectors -117 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table Motor Circuit Protector ing System H M C P A 0 C Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = 3 Poles HMCPE = 3 Poles HM2P = 2 Poles HMCPS = 3 Poles Continuous Ampere Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 9 30/0 C0 = 21 70/0 E0 = 4 10/0 D0 = 40 60/0 H1 = /1 G2 = 80 0/2 K2 = 10 00/2 J2 = /2 M2 = /2 L3 = /3 R3 = 300 0/3 T4 = 40 /4 U4 = /4 A = / C = / D = 00 0/ F = 62 0/ G = 70 / J = / K = / L = 1 220/ W = 0 200/ N = 3000/ R = / X = / Y = / L6 = /6 (Electronic) X6 = /6 (Electronic) Y6 = /6 (Electronic) X7 = /7 (Electronic) Y8 = /8 (Electronic) C = Non-aluminum Terminals W = W/O Terminals X = Load Terminals Only Y = Line Terminals Only S = Stainless Steel Terminals (10A Frame Only) No : Standard Terminals on Line and Load On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. Table Motor Circuit Protector ing System G M C P A 0 C Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = 3 Poles HMCPE = 3 Poles Continuous Ampere GMCP Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 1 30/0 C0 = 3 70/0 E0 = 7 10/0 H1 = /1 K2 = 20 00/2 J2 = 300 /2 M2 = /2 C = Non-aluminum Terminals HMCPE A0 = 9 33/0 C0 = 21 77/0 E0 = 4 16/0 H1 = /1 K2 = 10 0/2 M2 = /2 R3 = 300 1/2 T3 = 00 /2

118 -118 Motor Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [084] Product Selection E-Frame Table Y/347V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP G-Frame Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A B C D E F 0 7 A B C D E F 0 1 A B C D E F 1 30 A B C D E F 2 0 A B C D E F 2 70 A B C D E F 3 A B C D E F 3 A B C D E F Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 10xI n are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating. Note: All HMCPE 3 A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire, 14-1/ HMCPE003A0C. HMCPE007C0C. HMCPE01E0C. HMCPE030H1C. HMCPE00K2C. HMCPE070M2C 91. HMCPER3C 91. HMCPET3C A B C D E F 0 7 A B C D E F 0 1 A B C D E F 1 30 A B C D E F 2 0 A B C D E F 3 60 A B C D E F 3 63 A B C D E F Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 179 Note: All GMCP 3 63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Table -4 on Page -6 under Optional Terminal Types GMCP003A0C 423. GMCP007C0C 423. GMCP01E0C 423. GMCP030H1C 423. GMCP00K2C 4. GMCP060J2C 4. GMCP063M2C 4.

119 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [08] Motor Circuit Protectors -119 Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed. Table -18. Internal Accessories Type Accessory Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Style Factory Shunt Trip 0 Shunt Trip 240 Auxiliary Switch 240 Auxiliary Switch 240 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. LH only. RH only. Note: No UVR available on GMCP. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 12 for Alarm Switch; Instruction Leaflet/FRED 11 for Auxiliary Switch; Instruction Leaflet/FRED 10 for Shunt Trip a/1b 2a/2b 1373D62G D62G19 88C74G03 88C73G03 S S6 A3 A Alarm Switch 240 0/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break 88C7G03 B3 00 Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Switch Combination 240 0/60 Hz 6.0 1a/1b Make/Break 88C76G09 B13 00 Table External Mounted Accessories Description Units in Package Style Table Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism Description Lock Dog (Non-padlockable) Mounting Hardware DIN Rail Adapter C01H01 624B37G23 2C79G02 For use with standard 3 mm DIN rail such as, 3 x 7. or 1 mm per DIN EN0022. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C191 (DIN Rail Adapter) For Type 1 use For Type 3R, 4X, use Close Coupled Black with Gray Handle Close Coupled Red with Yellow Handle For use with GMCP only. HRGMV11L HRGMV14L HRGMC10 HRGMC

120 -0 Motor Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [086] F-Frame Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A B C D E F G H 0 7 A B C D E F G H 0 1 A B C D E F G H 1 30 A B C D E F G H 2 0 A B C D E F G H HMCP003A0C. HMCP007C0C. HMCP01E0C. HMCP030H1C. HMCP00K2C A B C D E F G H 3 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H HMCP070M2C 91. HMCPR3C 91. HMCP10T4C 1,320. HMCP10U4C 1,320. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C401 Note: HMCP 3 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3TFB. HMCP 10A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T10FB.

121 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [087] Motor Circuit Protectors -1 Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum Cont. Amps 2 A B C D E F G H 0 A B C D E F G H 70 A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Cam Setting MCP Trip Setting MCP For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C407 Note: HMCP 2 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3TFB. MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps 0 3 A B C D E F G H 0 7 A B C D E F G H Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps HMCP02D0C. HMCP00G2C 760. HMCP070J2C 91. HMCPL3C 91. MCP Trip Setting MCP HMCPS003A0C. HMCPS007C0C. Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps 0 1 A B C D E F G H 1 30 A B C D E F G H 2 0 A B C D E F G H 3 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP HMCPS01E0C. HMCPS030H1C. HMCPS00K2C 760. HMCPSR3C 91. HMCPS10T4C 1,320. HMCPS10U4C 1,320. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C401 Note: HMCPS 3 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3TFB. HMCPS 10A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T10FB.

122 -2 Motor Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [088] Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Product Description The type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 200,000A symmetrical at V AC, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See table). Table Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes Type ELC Current Limiter Maximum Amperes Standard Aluminum Terminals 0 10 Wire Range AWG /0 1 4/0 Non-standard Terminals (Steel) Metric (mm 2 ) Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL486A or UL486B. Optional on special order for copper cable only. Table ELC Current Limiter Attachment MCP (Amperes) ELC3003R ELC3007R ELC301R ELC3030R ELC300R ELC3R ELC310R Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C ,04. Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing single-phase operation. Each of the three poles of the type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter.

123 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [089] Motor Circuit Protectors -3 J-Frame Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I HMCP20AC 1,90. HMCP20CC 1,90. HMCP20DC 1,90. HMCP20FC 1,90. HMCP20GC 1, A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I 20 A B C D E F G H I HMCP20JC 1,90. HMCP20KC 1,90. HMCP20LC 1,90. HMCP20WC 1,90. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Three-pole s shown. Two-pole s begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C402 Note: All HMCP and HM2P 20A come with line and load steel body terminals, T20KB.

124 -4 Motor Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [090] K-Frame Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amps MCP Trip Setting MCP Table V AC Maximum, 20V DC Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I HMCP400DC 3,2. HMCP400FC 3,2. HMCP400GC 3,2. HMCP400JC 3,2. HMCP400KC 3,2. HMCP400LC 3, A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I HMCP400WC 3,2. HMCP400NC 3,2. HMCP400RC 3,2. HMCP400XC 3,2. HMCP400YC 3,00. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Three-pole s shown. Two-pole s begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C403 Note: All HMCP and HM2P 400A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K.

125 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [091] Motor Circuit Protectors - L-Frame N-Frame Table -19. V AC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP Table V AC Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H HMCPL6W,790. HMCPX6W,790. HMCPY6W,790. Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C404 Note: All HMCP A come without terminals. For Terminals See Table A B C D E F G 00 A B C D E F G HMCP800X7W 7,260. HMCPY8W 10,60. Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Note: All HMCP 800A and 00A come without terminals. For Terminals See Table -146.

126 -6 Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [092] Contents Description Page Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors Product Description Application Description Options and Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Product Selection Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Typical Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Application Description Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads For three-phase applications with lineto-neutral loads, select 4-pole earth leakage breakers and wire the neutral through the fourth (right) pole. Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads For applications with only three-phase, three-wire, line-to-line connected loads, select 3-pole earth leakage breakers. Single-Phase Loads For single-phase, two-wire or threewire applications, use a 3-pole earth leakage breaker and connect all conductors through the breaker. General Do not reverse feed. Do not apply on 400 Hz systems. Product Description Series C Earth Leakage Breakers offer superior Class 1 ground fault protection and improved ground fault coordination capability. Earth leakage ground fault protection differs from other types of systems in its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity of traditional devices is limited by the cumulative error of the residual current sensors and the placement of the phase and neutral conductors inside the current sensor. Leakage breakers are zero sequence sensing devices. They are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground fault relay built-in. This technique allows for protection sensitivities down to the 30 milliampere level. Leakage breakers are provided with a full complement of easy adjustments. The ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from 0.03 to 30 amperes in eight steps, and the ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps. When the pickup is set to 30 ma, the time delay setting defaults internally to instantaneous only. Increased selectivity provides for improved coordination with upstream and downstream ground fault devices as well as the flexibility to adjust for transient currents. Options and Accessories Optional Factory Installed Internal Accessories Earth leakage breakers use the same internal accessories as standard F-, J- and K-Frame Series C Breakers. Internal accessories fit in the right-hand pole space and are available as factory modifications only. Bell alarm is included as standard. Optional External Accessories Series C Earth Leakage Breakers use the same external accessories as the standard F-, J- and K-Frame circuit breakers. R.H. only.

127 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [093] Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors -7 Technical Data and Specifications Table Standard Line and Load Terminals Included with Breaker Frame F-Frame F-Frame 3 A A Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al () Range of Conductors (1) 14 1/0 AWG (1) 4 4/0 AWG Terminal Material Steel Stainless Steel J-Frame 20A Cu/Al (1) 4 AWG 20 kcmil Aluminum K-Frame K-Frame A 400A Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) kcmil (2) 3/0 20 kcmil Aluminum Aluminum Product Selection Table F-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 103 Amperes 2 ka at 480V AC 6 ka at 480V AC ka at 480V AC 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole ELFD301L ELFD3020L ELFD302L ELFD3030L ELFD303L ELFD3040L ELFD304L ELFD300L ELFD3060L ELFD3070L ELFD3080L ELFD3090L ELFD3L ELFD3110L ELFD3L ELFD310L 1,2. 1,30. 1,30. 1,30. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 1,70. 2,97. 2,97. 2,97. N/A N/A N/A N/A ELFD403L ELFD4040L ELFD404L ELFD400L ELFD4060L ELFD4070L ELFD4080L ELFD4090L ELFD4L ELFD4110L ELFD4L ELFD410L 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 2,21. 3,92. 3,92. 3,92. ELHFD301L ELHFD3020L ELHFD302L ELFHD3030L ELHFD303L ELHFD3040L ELHFD304L ELHFD300L ELHFD3060L ELHFD3070L ELHFD3080L ELHFD3090L ELHFD3L ELHFD3110L ELHFD3L ELHFD310L N/A = Not Available Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C118 or S.A.29A.03.S.E 1,40. 1,670. 1,670. 1,670. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 2,17. 3,89. 3,89. 3,89. N/A N/A N/A N/A ELHFD403L ELHFD4040L ELHFD404L ELHFD400L ELHFD4060L ELHFD4070L ELHFD4080L ELHFD4090L ELHFD4L ELHFD4110L ELHFD4L ELHFD410L 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660. 2,660.,010.,010.,010. ELFDC301L ELFDC3020L ELFDC302L ELFDC3030L ELFDC303L ELFDC3040L ELFDC304L ELFDC300L ELFDC3060L ELFDC3070L ELFDC3080L ELFDC3090L ELFDC3L ELFDC3110L ELFDC3L ELFDC310L 2,020. 2,13. 2,13. 2,13. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86. 2,86.,470.,470.,470. N/A N/A N/A N/A ELFDC403L ELFDC4040L ELFDC404L ELFDC400L ELFDC4060L ELFDC4070L ELFDC4080L ELFDC4090L ELFDC4L ELFDC4110L ELFDC4L ELFDC410L 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 4,460. 6,890. 6,890. 6,890. Table J-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 103 Amperes 3 ka at 480V AC 6 ka at 480V AC ka at 480V AC 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole ELJD3 ELJD3 ELJD310 ELJD317 ELJD3200 ELJD322 ELJD320 2,0. 2,0. 2,0. 2,0. 2,0. 2,0. 3,820. ELJD4 ELJD4 ELJD410 ELJD417 ELJD4200 ELJD422 ELJD420 4,610. 4,610. 4,610. 4,610. 4,610. 4,610. 6,60. ELHJD3 ELHJD3 ELHJD310 ELHJD317 ELHJD3200 ELHJD322 ELHJD320 4,40. 4,40. 4,40. 4,40. 4,40. 4,40.,810. ELHJD4 ELHJD4 ELHJD410 ELHJD417 ELHJD4200 ELHJD422 ELHJD420 6,910. 6,910. 6,910. 6,910. 6,910. 6,910. 8,90. ELJDC3 ELJDC3 ELJDC310 ELJDC317 ELJDC3200 ELJDC322 ELJDC320,620.,620.,620.,620.,620.,620. 6,890. ELJDC4 ELJDC4 ELJDC410 ELJDC417 ELJDC4200 ELJDC422 ELJDC420 8,420. 8,420. 8,420. 8,420. 8,420. 8, ,460. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C118 or S.A.29A.03.S.E

128 -8 Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [094] Table - K-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 103 Amperes 3 ka at 480V AC 6 ka at 480V AC ka at 480V AC 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole ELKD3200 ELKD322 ELKD320 ELKD3300 ELKD330 ELKD3400 4, , , , , ,61.00 ELKD4200 ELKD422 ELKD420 ELKD4300 ELKD430 ELKD4400 6, , , , , ,10.00 ELHKD3200 ELHKD322 ELHKD320 ELHKD3300 ELHKD330 ELHKD3400 7, , , , , , ELHKD4200 ELHKD422 ELHKD420 ELHKD4300 ELHKD430 ELHKD4400 8, , , , , , ELKDC3200 ELKDC322 ELKDC320 ELKDC3300 ELKDC330 ELKDC3400 7, , , , , , ELKDC4200 ELKDC422 ELKDC420 ELKDC4300 ELKDC430 ELKDC , , , , , , Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C118 or S.A.29A.03.S.E Table Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals Order Separately Wire Type () Range of Conductors Terminal Material Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu (2) 20 kcmil (1) 00 kcmil (2) 20 kcmil (1) 00 kcmil (1) 3 30 kcmil (1) 3 30 kcmil (1) kcmil (1) kcmil (1) 3/0 20 kcmil (1) 3/0 20 kcmil Package of 3 terminals. Package of 4 terminals. Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper 3TA401K TA401K T300K T300K T30K T30K 3T400K 4T400K Table F-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault Continuous Amperes 3-Pole Table F-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault (Continued) Continuous Amperes 3-Pole Table J and K-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault Continuous Amperes 3-Pole ELHMCP003A0C ELHMCP007C0C ELHMCP01E0C ELHMCP02X0C ELHMCP030H1C ELHMCP00K2C ELHMCP070M2C ELHMCPR3C ELHMCP10T4C ELHMCP10U4C ELHMCP003A0LC ELHMCP007C0LC ELHMCP01E0LC ELHMCP02D0C ELHMCP030H1LC ELHMCP070J2C 1, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ELHMCPL3C ELHMCP00G2C ELHMCP070J2C ELHMCPK3C HMCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays ELHMCPS003A0C ELHMCPS007C0C ELHMCPS01E0C ELHMCPS030H1C ELHMCPS00K2C ELHMCPSR3C ELHMCPS10T4C ELHMCPS10U4C 1, , , , , , , , , , , , ELHMCP20A ELHMCP20C ELHMCP20D ELHMCP20F ELHMCP20G ELHMCP20J ELHMCP20K ELHMCP20L ELHMCP20W 400 ELHMCP400D ELHMCP400F ELHMCP400G ELHMCP400J ELHMCP400K 3, , , , , , , , ,230.00,20.00,20.00,20.00,20.00,20.00 Discount Symbol CB-2

129 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [09] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Non-fused -9 Contents Description Page Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Type FCL Current Limit-R Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Non-fused Type LCL Current Limit-R Electronic Circuit Breakers Non-fused Type FB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Type LA Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Type NB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Type PB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Options and Accessories Type FCL Current Limit-R Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Non-fused Type FCL Breaker Product Description 1 to amperes, 480V AC Non-interchangeable trip, line and load terminals included Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted Type FCL breakers are not defined in Federal Specification W-C-37-b Technical Data and Specifications Table Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Line and Load Terminals Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Z to breaker listed. Table -20. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Wire Type Breaker Amperes Standard Pressure Terminals Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (Kg) Product Selection AWG Wire Range Al/Cu 14 1/0 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 0 of Poles Al/Cu Al/Cu (104.8) /0 Width Height Depth 8.8 (222.3) 2-Pole 9 (4.1) 3-Pole 9 (4.1) Table Type FCL Circuit Breakers Max. Cont. 40 C 2-Pole 3-Pole 3.4 (8.7) FCL On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer FCL201L FCL2020L FCL202L FCL2030L FCL203L FCL2040L FCL204L FCL200L FCL2060L FCL2070L FCL2080L FCL2090L FCL2L 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. 2,03. FCL301L FCL3020L FCL302L FCL3030L FCL303L FCL3040L FCL304L FCL300L FCL3060L FCL3070L FCL3080L FCL3090L FCL3L 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole.

130 -130 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Non-fused January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [096] Type LCL Current Limit-R Electronic Circuit Breakers Non-fused Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth (406.40) 8.2 (209.6) (103.19) Type LCL Breaker Product Description to 400 amperes, V AC with solid-state trip units Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted Type LCL breakers are not defined in Federal Specification W-C-37-b Technical Data and Specifications Table Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type LCL Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Table Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Standard With Ground Fault 2-Pole 32 (14.1) 3-Pole 32 (14.1) 36 (16.329) Product Selection Standard Breakers V AC, 0/60 Hz Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals. Table -2. Standard Breakers V AC, 0/60 Hz Frame Only Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Current Limiting) Short Time Only and Current Limiting Types LCL and LCLA 20 Ampere Frame ( 20 Amperes) 2 3 LCL220F LCL320F 4,43.,90. LCL220FM LCL320FM Type LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frame ( Amperes) 2 3 LCL2400F LCL3400F 4,890. 6,480. LCL2400FM LCL3400FM 2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. UL listed recognized component. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 127 Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection 4,43.,90. 4,890. 6,160. Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Adjustable Short Delay Time ( seconds) and Current Limiting LCLA220F LCLA320F LCLA2400F LCLA3400F Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals extra current transformer included for neutral. Table Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection Frame Only Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time Trip, Current Limiting and Ground Fault Trip),640. 6,740. 6,330. 7,90. Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Adjustable Short Delay Time ( seconds), Ground Fault Trip and Current Limiting Types LCLG and LCLGA 20 Ampere Frame (-20 Amperes) 3 LCLG320F 7,960. LCLGA320F 9,000. Types LCLG and LCLGA 400 Ampere Frame ( Amperes) 3 LCLG3400F 8,80. LCLGA3400F 10, pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 149 Discount Symbol CB-2

131 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [097] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Non-fused -131 Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. Table Terminals Max. Breaker Amps Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 30 kcmil Cu (1) 4 AWG 20 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0 kcmil Cu Terminal T22LA T401LA Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 30 kcmil Cu, or (1) 4 AWG 30 kcmil Al (1) 4 AWG 20 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0 kcmil Al/Cu TA22LA1 TA400LA Plug Selection Data plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection. Table -21. Plugs Only (For 2- or 3-Pole Frames) Cont. Amp Magnetic Trip Setting, Amps Fixed Plugs Low High Types LCL and LCLA 20 Ampere Frames LCL 2LCL10 2LCL17 2LCL200 2LCL22 2LCL20 Types LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frames LCL200 4LCL22 4LCL20 4LCL27 4LCL300 4LCL30 4LCL400 Adjustable 70 to % except as noted. Adjustable 7 to %. Adjustable 0 to %. Adjustable Plugs A2LCL17 A2LCL200 A2LCL22 A2LCL20 A4LCL300 A4LCL30 A4LCL

132 -132 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [098] Type FB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth (104.78) 8.7 (222.2) 3. (88.90) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. Breaker Complete Breaker 2-Pole 3-Pole Type Tri-Pac FB Breaker Product Description 1 to amperes, V AC, 20V DC, replaceable current limiters Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Labora-tories except as noted Tri-Pac FB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-37b Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Underwriters Laboratories listed V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical Based on NEMA Test Procedures 20V DC maximum:,000 amperes On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer Line and Load Terminals Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Z to breaker listed. Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Wire Type Breaker Amps Standard Pressure Terminals AWG Wire Range Al/Cu 14 1/0 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 0 Al/Cu Al/Cu /0 Tri-Pac FB Product Selection Table Type FB Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1436 (for fuse replacement) Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly Current Limiters: One required per pole. Table Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly Application 2-Pole ➀ (Current Limiters Included) FB201PL FB2020PL FB2030PL FB2040PL FB200PL FB2060PL FB2070PL FB2090PL FB2PL 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2,140. 2, Pole Note: Refer to CAT T.E for complete application information. (Current Limiters Included) FB301PL FB3020PL FB3030PL FB3040PL FB300PL FB3060PL FB3070PL FB3090PL FB3PL Supplied as standard in Type FB Tri-Pac breakers rated 1 amperes. Replaces 200FBP03 formerly supplied on 1 40 ampere ratings, and 00FBP07 formerly supplied on 0 ampere ratings. Table Current Limiter Housing Assembly Complete with Current Limiter Ampere 1 1 Poles C93G09 176C93G10 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. 2,8. FBP ,28. 1,28. Discount Symbol CB-2

133 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [099] Type LA Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth (201.0) 16 (406.4) 4.7 (113.) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Tri-Pac LA Type Tri-Pac LA Breaker Product Description 70 to 400 amperes, V AC, 20V DC 2-, 3-Pole, interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, except as noted Tri-Pac LA breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-37b Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Underwriters Laboratories listed V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical Based on NEMA Test Procedures 20V DC maximum:,000 amperes On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Customer Support Center Product Selection Table Type LA Circuit Breakers Cont. Magnetic Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals Amp Trip Includes Pressure Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter C Amps Type Copper 1 Required Terminals per Pole Low High 2 Poles, V AC, 20V DC Poles, V AC, 20V DC LA2070PR LA2090PR LA2PR LA2PR LA210PR LA217PR LA2200PR LA222PR LA220PR LA2300PR LA230PR LA2400PR LA3070PR LA3090PR LA3PR LA3PR LA310PR LA317PR LA3200PR LA322PR LA320PR LA3300PR LA330PR LA3400PR 3,83. 3,83. 3,83. 3,83. 3,83. 3,60. 3,83. 3,83.,640.,640.,640.,640. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 4,810. 6,480. 6,480. 6,480. 6,480. LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA2400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF LA3400PRF 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,11. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. 2,430. LA2070PT LA2090PT LA2PT LA2PT LA210PT LA217PT LA2200PT LA222PT LA220PT LA2300PT LA230PT LA2400PT LA3070PT LA3090PT LA3PT LA3PT LA310PT LA317PT LA3200PT LA322PT LA320PT LA3300PT LA330PT LA3400PT ,030. 2,030. 2,030. 2, ,00. 2,00. 2,00. 2, LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 200LAP08 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. Terminals shipped separately from breakers. 2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 141 for Trip Unit and Fuse

134 -134 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0] Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table -22. Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 200 amperes. Supplied as standard on 22 through 400 ampere ratings, optional on lower ratings when a higher cross-over point is desired. (Above two limiters replace 800LAP formerly supplied as standard on all ratings, LAP09 optional on all ratings through 300 amperes, 300LAP0 optional on ratings through 10 amperes, and special rating limiter 0LAP14.) Special rating where a higher cross-over point is desired on 200 ampere and higher ratings (Replaces limiter LAP20) 200LAP LAP LAP Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories Protection based on,000 ampere maximum fault, 480V maximum. Note: New limiters suitable for replacement in existing breakers by using plug-in conductor from old limiter (instructions included with limiter). Instruction Leaflet/FRED Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Z to complete breaker. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breakers. Table Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 30 kcmil Cu (1) 6 AWG 20 kcmil Cu (1) 4 AWG 20 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0 kcmil Cu Optional terminal. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Terminal T22LA T22LBF T401LA Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 30 kcmil Cu, or (1) 4 AWG 30 kcmil Cu/Al (1) 4 AWG 20 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0 kcmil Al/Cu TA22LA1 TA400LA

135 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0601] Type NB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth (209.6) 22 (8.80). (139.70) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Tri-Pac NB Type Tri-Pac NB Breaker Product Description 300 to 800 amperes, V AC, 20V DC Note: DC rating applies to 30 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers. 2-, 3-Pole, interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted Tri-Pac NB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-37b Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Underwriters Laboratories listed V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical Based on NEMA Test Procedures 20V DC maximum:,000 amperes Note: DC rating applies to 30 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers. On all 3-phase Delta, grounded B phase applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer Product Selection Table Type NB Circuit Breakers Cont. Magnetic Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals Amp Trip Includes Pressure Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter Setting Type Copper 1 C Amperes Terminals per Pole Low High 2 Poles, V AC, 20V DC Poles, V AC Only NB2300P NB230P NB2400P NB200P NB2P NB2700P NB2800P NB3300P NB330P NB3400P NB300P NB3P NB3700P NB3800P 8,080. 8,080. 8,080. 8,080. 8,080. 9,010. 9, 8,770. 8,810. 8,770. 9,800. 9, , ,240. NB2800PF NB2800PF NB2800PF NB2800PF NB2800PF NB2800PF NB2800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF NB3800PF,00.,00.,00.,00.,00.,00.,00.,660.,660.,660.,660.,660.,660.,660. NB2300PT NB230PT NB2400PT NB200PT NB2PT NB2700PT NB2800PT NB3300PT NB330PT NB3400PT NB300PT NB3PT NB3700PT NB3800PT 1,39. 1,39. 1,39. 1,39. 1,39. 2,32. 2,32. 1,690. 1,690. 1,690. 1,690. 1,690. 3,0. 3,0. 00NBP 00NBP 00NBP 00NBP 800NBP20 800NBP20 800NBP20 00NBP 00NBP 00NBP 00NBP 800NBP20 800NBP20 800NBP DC rating applies to 30 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers. 2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. 60 Hz AC only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED for Trip Unit and Fuse

136 -136 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0602] Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 00 amperes. Supplied as standard on 800 ampere ratings, optional on lower ratings when a higher cross-over point is desired. Above two limiters replace 0NBP14 formerly supplied on ratings up to amperes, NBP20 supplied on 700 amperes, and 200NBP2 supplied on 800 amperes. 00NBP NBP Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Z to complete breaker. Note: Shipped separately from breaker. Table Terminals Max. Amp Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals (1) 1 AWG kcmil Cu (2) 2/0 00 kcmil Cu (3) 3/0 00 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (2) 1 AWG 00 kcmil Al/Cu (3) 3/0 400 kcmil Al/Cu (3) kcmil Al/Cu Terminal T30NB T700NB1 T0NB1 TA0NB1 TA01NB

137 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0603] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused -137 Type PB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Type Tri-Pac PB Breaker Product Description to 1 amperes, V AC, 60 Hz AC, 20V DC Note: Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 0 Hz calibration available on special order. Note: 20V DC rating applies only to magnetic only breakers. 2-, 3-pole interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) Tri-Pac PB breakers meet the requirements for Class 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-37b Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Underwriters Laboratories listed V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical Based on NEMA Test Procedures 20V DC:,000 amperes On all 3-phase Delta, grounded of Poles Width Height Depth (306.4) (62.0) 9.06 (230.2) Table Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Tri-Pac PB 148 (67.2) 179 (81.3) 106 (48.1) 0 (4.) 18 (8.2) 23 (10.4) Product Selection Table Type PB Circuit Breakers Cont. C AC Magnetic Trip Setting (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Complete Breaker Low High 2 Poles, V AC Poles, V AC Only Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit Current Limiters and Connectors Includes Rear Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter T Connectors 1 Required per Pole PB2PR PB2700PR PB2800PR PB2900PR PB20PR PB200PR PB21400PR PB21PR PB3PR PB3700PR PB3800PR PB3900PR PB30PR PB300PR PB31400PR PB31PR 1,240. 1,240. 1,240. 1,240. 1,240. 1,240. 1,240. 1, , , , , , , , ,420. PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB21PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF PB31PRF 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 9,0. 11, , , , , , , ,110. PB2PRT PB2700PRT PB2800PRT PB2900PRT PB20PRT PB200PRT PB21400PRT PB21PRT PB3PRT PB3700PRT PB3800PRT PB3900PRT PB30PRT PB300PRT PB31400PRT PB31PRT Magnetic only trip units are available. Order by description. 2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED ,720. 3,720. 3,720. 3,720. 3,720. 3,720. 3,720. 3,720.,820.,820.,820.,820.,820.,820.,820.,820. 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 1PBPR30 1PBPR30 1PBPR30 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 0PBPR20 1PBPR30 1PBPR30 1PBPR30 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000. 1,000.

138 -138 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0604] Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table -23. Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 0 amperes. (Replaces limiter PBPR30 formerly supplied on and 700 ampere ratings, and 3000 PBPR27 supplied on ampere ratings.) Supplied as standard on 00 through 1 ampere ratings. Optional on lower ratings where a higher cross-over point is desired. (Replaces limiter 4000PBR30 formerly supplied on 00 through 1400 ampere ratings, and 000PBPR42 supplied on 1 ampere ratings.) Bus Bar Connectors T Connector for Cu/Al Bus Two required per pole. For rear bus connection. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90. Table Bus Bar Connectors BA2000PB. Note: Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories. 0PBPR20 1,000. 1PBPR30 1,000. Cable Connector (Optional) For T connector. Accepts four kcmil copper cables. Table Cable Connector (Optional) Special Breakers 0C706G Magnetic Only Type Tri-Pacs available on request. Note: Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories.

139 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [060] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories -139 Options and Accessories Alarm Switch For light or alarm indication when breaker trips. Does not function with manual operation. Automatically resets when breaker is relatched. Standard leads extend 18 inches (47.2 mm) outside of breaker. Not field mountable. Table Alarm Switch Breaker Frame FCL LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac LCL Normal Pole Meeting Center Left Left Left Left Contact Operation (Specific Type Desired) Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break When alarm switch is used in conjunction with auxiliary switch, the auxiliary switch is rated 20 volts max., amperes maximum. Alarm Switch Contact (Non Inductive) LA Tri-Pac: 10 amperes, 0V AC; A, 240V AC. Auxiliary Switch For auxiliary control circuits. Miniature switches mount within breaker. Commonly used for remote indication of open or closed breaker and electrically interlocking component control circuits. A contacts are closed when breaker is closed. B contacts are open when breaker is closed. Standard leads extend 18 inches (47.2 mm) outside of breaker. Note: Left-hand mounting is standard unless otherwise specified. Table Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting Breaker Type For Right-Hand Mounting FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac LCL 1A-1B 2A-2B Maximum AC Voltage 1369D79G D16G0 2602D32G14 For Left-Hand Mounting FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac LCL 1369D79G D16G 2602D32G D49G All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with a common electrical connection (see Figure -26). Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac breakers. For DC applications refer to factory. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 143 NB Tri-Pac; 1434 PB Tri-Pac; 1279 LCL Factory Mounted Auxiliary Switches Note: Left-hand mounting is standard unless otherwise specified. 4980D16G D32G1 4980D16G D32G 1372D49G Maximum Non-Inductive Amperes (10@240) (10@240) All of the above auxiliary switches can be specified for factory mounting at the same price as listed for the kit. These attachments have the leads out the side of the breaker and are UL listed when factory mounted unless other non-ul-listed modifications are used (except as noted). Factory mounted switches only can be supplied for the following breakers: FB Tri-Pac, LA Tri-Pac. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only. Red Lead Black Lead Blue Lead Figure -26. Auxiliary Switches

140 -140 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0606] Shunt Trip For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. Shunt trips should not be used as circuit interlocks using maintained contact pilot devices. A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when breaker opens. Available for control voltages up to 20V DC or V AC. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend 18 inches (47.2 mm) outside of breaker. Table Shunt Trip for Field Mounting Voltage/Hz Breaker Type FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac Right-Hand Mounting /0 60 Hz 480/0 60 Hz 240/0 60 Hz 208/0 60 Hz 0/0 60 Hz 60/0 60 Hz 48/0 60 Hz 24/0 60 Hz 20 DC DC 60 DC 48 DC 24 DC DC Left-Hand Mounting /0 60 Hz 480/0 60 Hz 240/0 60 Hz 208/0 60 Hz 0/0 60 Hz 60/0 60 Hz 48/0 60 Hz 24/0 60 Hz 20 DC DC 60 DC 48 DC 24 DC DC 1369D80G1 1369D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G2 1369D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G0 1369D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G D80G 1369D80G D80G D8G1 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G2 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G0 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G 2606D8G D8G V AC ratings suitable for % pickup for ground fault applications. Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (MCS). Field mounting voids breakers UL listing except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED s 1194 (FCL); (NB Tri-Pac); (PB Tri-Pac) Factory mounted shunt trips only can be supplied for FB Tri-Pac and LA Tri-Pac breakers. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only. FB Tri-Pac not UL listed. 2606D8G1 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G2 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G0 2606D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G 2606D8G D8G Table Left-Hand Mounting Kits for Type LCL Current Limiting Breakers Description Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 32 to 0V (DC to 60 Hz) source. Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 240 to V (0/60 Hz) source. 1372D49G D49G UL listing pending. Refer to Cutler-Hammer. Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications. Also available factory mounted for 24V DC. Order by description. Not for ground fault. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1279 Table Shunt Trip Coil Data for Type LCL Current Limiting Breakers Shunt Trip Coil Inrush Voltage Amperes Volt-Amperes 0 AC.1 18 Discount Symbol CB-2

141 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0607] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories -141 Table Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting Attachment Voltage/ Hz Breaker Type For Right-Hand Mounting For Left-Hand Mounting NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac Standard Undervoltage Release For undervoltage protection. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Coil must be energized before closing breaker. Trips breaker when voltage drops below 40 to 60% of coil rating. Picks up and seals in at 80% of coil rating. For line voltages up to 20V DC or V AC. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. Standard leads extend 18 inches (47.2 mm) outside of breaker. Note: U.V.R. attachments are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. For further information, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Factory Mounted Undervoltage Releases NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac undervoltage releases can be specified for factory mounting at the same price as the kit. These attachments have the leads out the side and are UL listed when factory mounted unless other non-ul listed modifications are used. Note: Right-hand mounting considered standard unless specified otherwise. 24/60 48/60 0/60 208/60 240/60 480/60 /60 DC 24 DC 48 DC 60 DC DC 20 DC Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED (NB Tri-Pac); (PB Tri-Pac) Table Undervoltage Release Coil Data Voltage AC 480 AC 240 AC 208 AC 0 AC 60 AC 48 AC 24 AC 20 AC AC 60 AC 48 AC 24 AC AC 373D632G01 373D632G19 373D632G02 373D632G03 373D632G04 372D032G01 372D032G02 372D032G03 372D032G04 372D032G0 Breaker Type FB Tri-Pac Coil Amperes D29G16 674D29G09 674D29G10 674D29G11 674D29G13 674D29G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G D8G08 Series Resistance (Ohms) 2,000 2,000 6,000 6, , D632G0 373D632G20 373D632G06 373D632G07 373D632G08 372D032G06 372D032G07 372D032G08 372D032G09 372D032G10 LCL D29G08 674D29G01 674D29G02 674D29G03 674D29G0 674D29G D8G D8G 4976D8G D8G D8G D8G18 Total VA Coil Amperes Total VA Factory mounted undervoltage releases only can be supplied for the following breakers: FB Tri-Pac, LA Tri-Pac and FCL; LCL 0V AC only. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only. UL listing pending for LCL. Table -24. Undervoltage Release Coil Data Voltage Breaker Type LA Tri-Pac, PB Tri-Pac Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA NB Tri-Pac Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA AC 480 AC 240 AC 208 AC 0 AC 48 AC 20 AC AC 60 AC 48 AC 24 AC AC ,000,000 1, ,000 30,000 16,00 6,

142 -142 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0608] Rear Connected Studs For complete stud assembly, order a stud and appropriate tube based on thickness of customer s mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories. Two studs are required per pole. Note: Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Note: Two 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud. Panelboard Connecting Straps For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus. Note: Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Table Panelboard Connecting Straps Ampere Connector Type Power Panelboards (Convertible) for Tri-Pac FB and FCL Breakers Bus Spacing 3.-inch (88.9 mm) Center Outside Center Outside Center Outside 3-Pole Mtg. Bracket 2-Pole Mtg. Bracket 3C72G01 3C72G02 3C73G03 3C73G04 3C73G01 3C73G02 624BH01 624BH For LCL Breakers Bus Spacing 3.-inch (88.9 mm) Short Medium Long Mtg. Bracket Kit (1 Req d) 7C8G01 7C8G02 7C8G B044G Table Studs for FCL and FB Tri-Pac Mounting Panel Stud Thickness Length Inches (mm) FCL and FB Tri-Pac Breakers 1.00 (2.4) Short Long ( ) Short Long (9. 1.9) Short Long.2.31 ( ) Short Long Included at no charge when ordered with stud. Table Studs for LCL, LA Tri-Pac and NB Tri-Pac 10, 20, 300 and 400 ampere frames only. Plug-In Adapter Kits Stud Ampere Diameter, Inches and Thread LCL, LA Tri-Pac Breakers NB Tri-Pac Breakers (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.2 (31.7) 1.2 (31.7) 41D874G01 41D874G02 41D874G01 41D874G02 41D874G01 41D874G02 41D874G01 41D874G02 For rear connected applications such as switchboards. Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker. Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting hardware. Order two mounting block style numbers when line and load are required; order one mounting block style number when either line or load is required. Table FB Tri-Pac and FCL Breakers (Flat Bar Type) Description 1 Mounting Block, Line or Load 2-Pole, Ampere 2-Pole, 10 Ampere 3-Pole, Ampere 3-Pole, 10 Ampere 1480D13G These plug-in adapter kits are UL listed as recognized components. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Extension Back of Breaker, Inches.47 (138.9) 7.97 (202.4) (26.9).0 (139.7) 8.00 (203.2) 10.0 (266.7).0 (139.7) 10.0 (266.7) Tube Length Inches (mm) 1.06 (26.9) 3.44 (87.3) 1.38 (3.1) 3.7 (9.3) 1.69 (42.9) 4.06 (103.1) 2.00 (0.8) 4.38 (110.7) 32B9446H20 32B9446H24 32B9446H21 32B9446H2 32B9446H22 32B9446H26 32B9446H23 32B9446H27 Stud 0B7383G1 0B7383G16 0B7383G17 623B222G01 623B222G02 623B222G03 373B37G04 373B37G03 Table -20. LCL Breakers (Threaded Stud Type) Description 2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load 2-Pole 313C644G2 3-Pole 313C644G26 1 Mounting Block, Line and Load 2-Pole 3-Pole 40D010G1 40D010G16 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1329 Table -21. NB Tri-Pac Breakers (Flat Bar Type) Description 1 Mounting Block, Line or Load NB Tri-Pac, 2 Poles NB Tri-Pac, 3 Poles 2614D3G D3G04 Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1073 Table -22. Tri-Pac LA Breakers (Threaded Stud Type) Description 2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load 2-Pole 313C644G41 3-Pole 313C644G42 1 Mounting Block, Line Only 2-Pole 40D010G17 3-Pole 40D010G19 1 Mounting Block, Load Only 2-Pole 3-Pole 40D010G18 40D010G20 Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED , , , , , Discount Symbol CB-2

143 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0609] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories -143 Mounting Block for NB Tri-Pac Breakers Table -23. Mounting Block Ampere NB Tri-Pac of Poles D16G D16G03 2, ,91.00 Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Insulated base with front removeable bolted connection. Handle Locks Non-padlockable For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over breaker handle and may be removed. Kirk Key Interlock Availability: FB, LA, NB, PB Tri-Pacs. Permits interlocking of two breakers or one breaker with other devices. Before breaker can be closed, key must be inserted and turned in breaker interlock. Breaker must be opened before key can be removed. It can then be inserted in interlock or other devices to permit their closure. Requests and orders should completely outline interlocking scheme, ultimate user and his address. Extended Line Terminal Shields For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of 10, including hardware. Table -24. Extended Line Terminal Shields Breaker Frame FB Tri-Pac, FCL LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Insulated base with front removeable bolted connection. Base Mounting Hardware Order separately when needed. Table -2. Base Mounting Hardware Breaker Frame FB Tri-Pac, FCL LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac 62B229G01 314C420G0 208B996G02 21C6782G18 21C6782G G22 Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion Treatment Treatment can be provided to meet customer s specific atmospheric conditions. Moisture-fungus treating material used meets JAN-T-12; treatment meets MIL-V-173a. Requests and orders should specify government specifications or conditions to be met. Padlockable For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is non-removable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters Laboratories and California Code requirements. Note: All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached. Cannot be used when handle extension is used. Table -26. Handle Locks Breaker Frame Non-padlockable FB Tri-Pac LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac Padlockable FB Tri-Pac LA Tri-Pac Not Underwriters Laboratories listed. Insulated base with front removeable bolted connection. Handle Extension Table -27. Handle Extension Breaker Frame LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac 29B2721H A74G01 373B91G02 Included with frame. 372B399G01 1C6G01 31C882G Note: Not available for FCL or LCL breakers. Mechanical Interlocks For mechanically interlocking a pair of breakers so that only one may be closed at one time, but both may be open simultaneously. Note: Included with frame. Walking Beam Type Mounts on panel (not included) at rear of breaker. Standard breaker spacing: LA Tri-Pac, NB Tri-Pac: 8-1/2 inches center to center; FB Tri-Pac: 4-3/8 inches center to center; PB Tri-Pac: -1/4 inches center to center. Order as a set of two special factory drilled breakers and one walking beam interlock. Specify breaker type, panel thickness and center-tocenter dimension of breakers. Note: Included with frame. Not UL listed. Not available on drawout breakers. Sliding Bar Type (Field Mountable) Mounts on panel (not included) fitting over front of breakers. Standard breaker spacing: LA Tri-Pac, NB Tri-Pac: 8-1/2 inches (21.9 mm); FB Tri-Pac: 4-3/16 inches (106.4 mm) center to center. Note: Included with frame. Not available for FCL or LCL breakers. Note: Included with frame.

144 -144 Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0610] Motor Operators Motor operators provide complete remote control by means of a pushbutton or similar pilot device. Positive switching action is accomplished by use of an operating arm engaging the breaker handle. The unit is energized momentarily to actuate the lever arm moving it to either the ON or OFF position. The control is broken by an internal cutoff switch. Means for emergency manual operation is provided. For FB Tri-Pac/FCL Breakers For LA Tri-Pac Breakers Note: The pilot device must be maintained contact type for FB Tri-Pac, FCL mechanisms; momentary contact type for all others. Motor operators are available with motors rated 0V AC, 208V AC, and 240V AC. Note: AC voltage rated operators are UL listed as recognized components. The 480V operators utilize a 0V AC motor in conjunction with a 480/240 to 0V dual voltage transformer. (On LA and larger operators, the transformer is supplied for separate mounting by the customer.) For NB Tri-Pac Breakers For PB Tri-Pac Breakers Note: The motor operator is intended only for infrequent operation in line with Underwriters Laboratories endurance standard for AB molded case breakers. Table -28. Motor Operator Selection Type Breaker AC Voltage DC Voltage FCL LCL FB Tri-Pac LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac 66D148G1 664D4G83 66D148G D97G22 664D4G6 661D2G , ,440. 3,67. 4, D148G10 664D4G86 66D148G D97G2 664D4G68 661D2G , ,44. 3,67. 4, D148G17 664D4G84 66D148G D97G23 664D4G66 661D2G ,44. 1,11. 3,440. 3,67. 4, D148G17 664D4G8 66D148G D97G24 664D4G67 661D2G ,76. 1,11. 3,440. 3,980. 4, D4G D97G44 664D4G82 661D2G17 4,210. 3,440. 4,43. 4, D4G88 3,44. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED (FCL); 1334 (LCL); (FB Tri-Pac); 133 (LA Tri-Pac); 134 (NB Tri-Pac); (PB Tri-Pac) Table -29. Back Mounting Plates Type Breaker 0, 208, 240, 480 Volts AC FB-P/FCL 82C01G01. Table Motor Data Type Breaker Motor Inrush Current, Ampere (Peak) Continuous Current (RMS) Operating Time, Open or Close Type hp 0 Volts 208 Volts 240 Volts 0 Volts 208 Volts 240 Volts FB Tri-Pac LA Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac Split Phase Reversing Reversing Reversing 1/ Seconds Cycles Cycles 10 Cycles Discount Symbol CB-2

145 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0611] Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories -14 Table Selection Data Breaker Type Stationary Mounting Frame Movable Carrier Frame Drawout Frame These drawout frames are for use with standard 3-pole Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers. They consist of two separate parts; stationary mounting frame and movable carrier frame. Slide rails are drawer-type, and a screw mechanism is used to engage or withdraw the movable carrier frame. The drawout frames have three positions: connected, test and disconnected. The frames do not include a safety tripping interlock, or secondary contacts. These are optional items and may be ordered at additional cost. Breakers mounted in the drawout frames can be equipped with standard breaker accessories including shunt trip, undervoltage release, auxiliary switch, alarm switch and motor operator. NB Tri-Pac 2603D8G09 2, D34G 3,40. Drawout for FB and LA Tri-Pac, FCL and LCL Circuit Breakers are not available. PB Tri-Pac movable is available factory-installed only. Order by description. Secondary Contacts These are used to disconnect auxiliary circuits when attachments such as shunt trip or motor operator are used. Available in multiples of four contacts with a maximum of 32 contacts for the NB Tri-Pac. They must be factory mounted. Order by description as similar to stationary or moving frame and specify number of contacts required. Standard Installation Order one stationary mounting frame and one movable carrier frame. Order breakers without terminals or rear connectors. Order any attachments desired (shunt trip, undervoltage release, etc.). Order secondary contacts as required: A shunt trip, undervoltage release or alarm switch requires two contacts A 1A-1B auxiliary switch requires three contacts A motor operator requires a maximum of four contacts Others as required Racking Crank A special crank to engage or withdraw the moving portion of the drawout. A standard 1/2 inch (.7 mm)hex socket with extension can be used for this purpose. Table Racking Crank 76A767G01 2. Cell Switches Mounted on Drawout Frames, All s Up to four switches can be provided. Order by description. Each switch provides NO and NC contact that transfers before reaching the test position when being withdrawn, and after the test position when being racked in.

146 -146 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [06] Contents Description Page Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Product Description Standards and Certifications Technical Data and Specifications Product Selection Enclosures Options and Accessories Product Description Engine Generator Molded Case Circuit Breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generators where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. The JG through NG breakers are equipped with a special trip unit, that includes standard thermal (overload) protection and special low magnetic pickup range (FG includes a fixed thermal/magnetic pickup). The standard thermal trip unit provides overload protection for conductors per the National Electric Code. The low magnetic pickup range is approximately two to five times the continuous rating and provides closer low level short circuit protection when applied on generators that have very low short circuit capacity. This combination allows the user to customize the breaker to the generator output. Engine Generator Circuit Breakers are suitable for reverse feed application. Technical Data and Specifications Table UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Volts AC (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amps) 18,000 14,000 10,000 Standards and Certifications Engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures File E7819 Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No., Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 947-2, Circuit Breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Table IEC Interrupting Capacity s Volts AC (0/60 Hz) 220, , , 690 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amps) 18,000/9,000 14,000/7,000 10,000/,000

147 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0613] Engine Generator Circuit Breakers -147 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers. FG breakers include both line and load side terminals. JG, KG, LG and NG breakers with W do not include any terminals. Table -26. ing System F G W JG, KG, LG, and NG breakers without W include both line and load terminals. Contact Cutler-Hammer for additional ratings and internal/ external accessories. Frame FG of Poles 3 = 3 Poles Trip Amperes W = Without Terminals JG KG LG NG

148 -148 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0614] Product Selection The following table lists FG through NG engine generator breakers with the maximum generator kva and kw rating. Engine generator breakers are applied at 11% of the Table Product Selection Magnetic Pickup Range generator full load current rating. The maximum kw rating is based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. Maximum Generator 60 Hz Engine Generator Breaker 240V AC 480V AC V AC kva kw kva kw kva kw Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed NG300,960. Breaker continuous current is based on 11% of the generator full load ampere rating. Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. Without terminals. Breaker includes line and load terminals FG301 FG3020 FG302 FG3030 FG303 FG3040 FG304 FG300 FG3060 FG3070 FG3080 FG3090 FG3 FG3110 FG3 FG310 FG317 FG3200 FG322 JG317W JG317 JG3200W JG3200 JG322W JG322 JG320W JG320 KG3300W KG3300 KG330W KG330 KG3400 LG340 LG300 LG3 NG3700 NG3800 NG3900 NG ,110. 1,110. 1, , , ,110. 1,62. 1,760. 1,730. 1,870. 1,730. 1,870. 1,870. 3,02. 3,02. 3,02. 4,07. 4,07.,110.,110.

149 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [061] Engine Generator Circuit Breakers -149 Enclosures Type 1 General Purpose Surface or flush mounting 1 00 ampere range V AC, 00V DC Type 1 enclosed breakers are designed for use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in either the ON or OFF position. s through 00 amperes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as approved for service entrance application. Both surface and flush mounted enclosures are available. Type 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting Interchangeable hubs (through 400 amperes) 1 00 ampere range V AC, 00V DC This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel breaker enclosure to serve as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. s through 00 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Type Dustproof Surface Mounting No knockouts or other openings 1 00 ampere range V AC, 00V DC The Type enclosure is designed in line with specifications for special industry application where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position. s through 00 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. E B C E C E C ON D A A D OFF A D ON OFF B B Figure -27. Type 1 Surface Mounted Figure -28. Type 3R Rainproof Figure -29. Type, K Dustproof Table Enclosure Selection Data Breaker Frame Amperes Enclosure Type Class Dimensions A B C D E Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm App. Wt. Lbs. Conduit Sizes, Inches FG 1 22 JG KG LG 40 NG Type 1 Type 3R Type Type 1 Type 3R Type Type 1 Type 3R Type Type 1 Type 3R Type Type 1 Type 3R Type ,.0,.7, 1, 1.2, 1.0, 2, 2.0.2,.0,.7, 1, 1.2, 1.0, 2, 2.0.2,.0, 2, 2.0, 3.2,.0, 2, 2.0, 3.2,.0,.7, 1.0, 2, 2.0, 3, 3.0.2,.0,.7, 2.0, 3, 3.0.2,.0,.7, 3, 3.0, 4.2,.0,.7, 3, 3.0, 4 SFDN22 RFDN22 JFDN22 SJDN20 RJDN20 JJDN20 SKDN400 RKDN400 JKDN400 SLDN RLDN JLDN SNDN00 RNDN00 JNDN , , ,730. 1,32.

150 -10 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0616] Options and Accessories Table Standard Terminals Breaker Frame FG FG JG KG KG LG NG NG NG Max. Amp AWG Wire Range 14 1/0 4 4/ kcmil Package of 3 terminals kcmil 3/0 20 kcmil (2) kcmil (2) Metric Wire Range mm Table Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable Max. Enclosure (Amps) kcmil (2) 3/0 400 kcmil (3) 4/0 00 kcmil (4) Main Lug Size Cu/Al Ground Lug Size Cu/Al 3TFB 3TA22FD TA20KB TA30K 3TA400K 3TA603LDK TA0NB1 TA00NB (1) 14 1/0 (1) 14 1/0 INK (1) 6 30 kcmil (1) kcmil INK (1) 4 70 kcmil or (1) kcmil INK (2) 1/0 20 kcmil (2) kcmil (1) kcmil INK (3) 1/0 to 70 kcmil or (4) 1/0 to 70 kcmil (1) 6 20 kcmil INK Internal Accessories Table Auxiliary Switch Breaker Frame FG JG KG LG NG 1A-1B Table Shunt Trip Breaker Frame FG JG KG LG NG A1X1PK A1X2PK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1XPK 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 2A-2B A2X1RPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2XPK SNT1LP03K SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNTLP03K

151 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0617] Direct Current Circuit Breakers -11 Contents Description Page Direct Current Circuit Breakers Product Description Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams Product Selection Product Description UL listed DC Molded Case Circuit Breakers for use in general DC circuits and ungrounded battery supply circuits of UPS systems providing continuous, reliable AC power to computer controlled applications such as financial transactions and telecommunications. For standard interrupting capacity 20 DC molded case circuit breakers. Refer to Table -1. The Series C DC breakers listed below use the same internal and external accessories as the standard Series C breaker. NBDC and PBDC use same internal and external accessories as standard NB and PB breakers. Molded case circuit breakers for transportation application requiring 70V DC are available ampere 20 ka interrupting capacity at 70V DC. Breakers require 4 poles in series for 70V DC application. However, 70V is not a UL rating. For 70V DC application refer to Cutler-Hammer for ordering information. Dimensions are the same as the standard thermal-magnetic equivalent. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Table UL489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type HFDDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC PBDC Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical ka) Volts DC DC ratings apply to substantially noninductive circuits. 8 millisecond time constant. 1 pole in series. 2 poles in series. 3 poles in series. 4 poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage rating. Wiring Diagrams V DC 3 Poles in Series 70V DC 4 Poles in Series Load Load Load Figure -30. Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application Note: Use rated cable per NEC Connect to terminals as per breaker nameplate.

152 -12 Direct Current Circuit Breakers January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0618] Product Selection Table Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C700 Table Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers 1, 2, 3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 3 V DC Maximum Continuous 40 C HFDDC101L HFDDC1020L HFDDC102L HFDDC1030L HFDDC103L HFDDC1040L HFDDC104L HFDDCL HFDDC1060L HFDDC1070L HFDDC1080L HFDDC1090L HFDDC1L HFDDC1110L HFDDC1L HFDDC110L Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀ Pole High Interrupting Capacity 3 V DC HJDDC320F HKDDC3400F HKDDC3400F HLDDC3F HFDDC201L HFDDC2020L HFDDC202L HFDDC2030L HFDDC203L HFDDC2040L HFDDC204L HFDDC200L HFDDC2060L HFDDC2070L HFDDC2080L HFDDC2090L HFDDC2L HFDDC2110L HFDDC2L HFDDC210L Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit 3, JT3070T JT3090T JT3T JT3T JT310T JT317T JT3200T JT322T JT320T 4, KT3T KT3T KT310T KT317T KT3200T KT322T 4, KT320T KT3300T KT330T KT3400T, LT3300T LT330T LT3400T LT340T LT300T LT3T Complete circuit breaker includes frame, trip unit and terminals. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C701 and 29C , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,66.00 HFDDC301L HFDDC3020L HFDDC302L HFDDC3030L HFDDC303L HFDDC3040L HFDDC304L HFDDC300L HFDDC3060L HFDDC3070L HFDDC3080L HFDDC3090L HFDDC3L HFDDC3110L HFDDC3L HFDDC310L HFDDC317L HFDDC3200L HFDDC322L Standard Terminals TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA20KB TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA300K TA30K TA30K TA30K 3TA400K TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD TA602LD 3TA603LDK 1, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

153 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0619] Direct Current Circuit Breakers -13 Table -27. Type HMDL DC Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 3 V DC 300 HMDL3800F HMDL3800F Complete circuit breaker includes frame, trip unit and terminals. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit,90. MT3300T MT330T MT3400T MT340T,90. MT300T MT3T MT3700T MT3800T 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. 2,620. Table Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals 3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 0 V DC Complete circuit breaker includes frame, trip unit and terminals. Table Type PBDC DC Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous 40 C NBDC3700MW NBDC3800MW NBDC3900MW NBDC30MW NBDC300MW Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals 13, , , , , Pole High Interrupting Capacity 7 V DC PBDC31W PBDC32000W PBDC3200W 24, , ,330. Includes Magnetic Only Trip Unit 13% Included Included Included Included Included Includes Magnetic Only Trip Unit 13% Included Included Included Complete circuit breaker includes frame, trip unit and terminals. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 160 Standard Terminals TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA00NB1 Standard Terminals BA2000PB BA2000PB BA200PB

154 -14 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0620] Contents Description Page Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR Product Description Electrical s Options Accessories Product Selection Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFM Product Description Accessories Product Selection Type GFR GFR Relay A basic Type GFR ground fault protection system consists of a ground fault relay, a ground fault current sensor and a disconnect device equipped with a shunt trip device. This disconnect device can be a molded case circuit breaker, a power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure switch or other fusible disconnect device, suitable for application with UL Class I Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying equipment. Note: Relays are also listed with CSA under their file number Product Description The GFR Ground Fault Relays, current sensors, test panels and accessory devices are UL listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with their standard for Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment, UL 103, under File E Note: Suitable for either surface or semiflush mounting. A Type GFR ground fault protection system, when properly installed on a grounded electrical system, will sense phase-to-ground fault currents. When the level of fault current is in excess of the pre-selected current pickup and time delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate a trip action of a disconnect device, which will open the faulted circuit and clear the fault. The GFR devices are UL Class I devices designed to protect electrical equipment against extensive damage from arcing ground faults. Typical Current Sensor Sensor V, 0/60 Hz maximum system voltage Electrical s GFR Relay Ground Fault Detection Ranges: 1 to, to 60 or to 00 amperes Output contacts: 240V, 0/60 Hz: 3.0 amperes 0V, 0/60 Hz: 6.0 amperes 28V DC: 3.0 amperes V DC:. amperes Control power requirements: 0V, 0/60 Hz:. amperes, or V DC (optional)

155 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0621] Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR -1 Options and Accessories Options Additional optional equipment can be added to the protection system to meet the requirements of the specifying engineer, including: Ground Fault Test Panel Ground Fault Warning Indicator Relay Ground Fault Indicating Ammeter GFR relays are available with zone selective interlocking circuitry to interlock several relays within the same system. This allows the relay which detects a ground fault to instantly clear the fault by tripping the disconnect device. The relay simultaneously sends a signal to relay units upstream from the fault to time delay or to block their operation completely. Current sensors in various designs provide a range of window sizes to accommodate standard bus and cable arrangements. Shunt trip attachments may be ordered for field mounting in Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers, or may be ordered factory installed in the breaker. Accessories Test Panel (0V AC) Used to test the ground fault system, to give an indication the relay has tripped the breaker, and to reset the relay after tripping. These functions may be separately mounted pilot devices. Note: When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault. Not UL listed. Table Optional Test Panel Control Test 0V 0/60 Hz V DC 0V 0/60 Hz 0V 0/60 Hz GFRTP GFRTPD Ground Fault Warning Indicator This is an accessory item for use with GFR Relays with interlocking circuitry. At approximately 30 0% of the relay pickup setting, the indicator switches separate 0V AC control power to a lamp or relay, (not included) to give an indication of a ground fault. The indicator is rated 110/0V AC 0/60 Hz for a maximum indicator load of. amperes. Indicating Ammeter The optional indicating ammeter. It connects to the sensor terminals, through a momentary contact pushbutton, and will indicate (in amperes) any ground fault current flowing through the sensor. Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton. Note: Not UL listed. Table Ammeter Kit GFR System Used with 1 Ampere 60 Ampere 00 Ampere Shunt Trip Attachments Use 0V AC shunt trips. Face Plate Recommended when these relays are semi-flush mounted, to close the door cutout opening. Table Face Plate Description Kit 72B820G01 72B820G02 72B820G Face Plate 72B410G Table Ground Fault Warning Indicator Description Manual Reset 34C67G Self-Resetting 34C67G

156 -16 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0622] Product Selection Each installation requires: One relay unit (select trip ampere as required) One current sensor (select configuration required) Table GFR Relay GFR Relay Types One circuit breaker or disconnect device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip attachment for mounting in existing breaker Test panel (optional) For 0V 0/60 Hz Control Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking GFREI 1,72. GFR60EI 1,72. GFR00EI 1,800. Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking GFRE 1,40. GFR60E 1,40. GFR00E 1,6. Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking GFRMI 1,84. GFR60MI 1,84. GFR00MI 1,92. Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking GFRM 1,670. GFR60M 1,670. GFR00M 1,77. For 0V DC Control Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking GFR00EID 66. Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking GFR00ED 1,6. Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking GFR00MID 76. Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking GFR00MD 1,77. Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. Table Current Sensor Window Size Used with Relays Rated 1 Amperes One end removable for installation. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1321 Ground Fault Pickup Amperes In. I.D. 83C4G Used with Relays Rated 60 Amperes 2.0 In. I.D..0 In. I.D. 8.2 In. I.D x In. Rect x In. Rect. 179C768G01 6C13G01 179C767G01 7C88G04 7C92G ,43. 2,820. Used with Relays Rated 00 Amperes 2.0 In. I.D..0 In. I.D. 8.2 In. I.D x In. Rect x In. Rect x In. Rect x In. Rect x In. Rect. 6.7 x In. Rect. 179C768G02 6C13G02 179C767G02 7C88G03 7C90G02 7C91G02 7C89G02 7C92G04 C39G ,43. 1,84. 2,390. 2,3. 2,820. 3,060. Discount Symbol CB-2

157 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0623] Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFM -17 Type GFM Ground Fault Protection Device Interchangeable Plug Reset Indicator Button Product Description Cutler-Hammer Type GFM devices are Class 1 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying devices designed to comply with the requirements outlined in Underwriters Laboratories Standards for Safety entitled: Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment, UL103. Type GFM devices, when properly installed on a grounded electrical distribution system, will sense phase to ground fault currents and cause a disconnect to open and clear the fault instantaneously at predetermined current values. These devices have a maximum voltage rating of V, 0/60 Hertz and may be applied in accordance with Article of the National Electrical Code. Type GFM Ground Fault Protective Devices are self-contained combination sensing and relaying devices designed primarily for application on motor circuits and fixed loads where low-level Ground Fault Equipment Protection is required. GFM devices are available in two basic types, with each type having two physical sizes. The two basic types differ in the type of output circuit provided. The first type, designated either GFM2 or GFM4, employs an internal relay having S.P.D.T. contacts that will operate a remote shunt trip device where control power is available. The second type, designated either GFM2A or GFM4A, is completely solidstate with an output SCR circuit designed to operate a remote, lowenergy, flux transfer shunt trip mounted in a molded case breaker. No supplementary control power for the shunt trip is required. Trip Indication/Reset A combination visual indicator and reset button is provided on the top of Type GFM2 and GFM4 devices to indicate the initiation of a tripping action to clear a Ground Fault. The operation of the internal relay will cause the white button to visibly raise. To reset the device, the Indicator/Reset button must be depressed. Failure to reset the device will not allow the associated disconnect device to be reclosed. No Indicator/Reset button is provided on Types GFM2A or GFM4A since an internal SCR is used in the output circuit. These devices reset automatically when the disconnect opens to clear the Ground Fault. Plug Type GFM Ground Fault Protection Device Output Circuitry Contact ratings for Type GFM2 and GFM4 are 10 amperes continuous, 240V AC maximum. Types GFM2A and GFM4A are intended to be used only with remote flux transfer shunt trips. Options and Accessories Optional Mounting Brackets Includes two (2) brackets and mounting hardware. Table Optional Mounting Brackets GFM Type Bracket Kit GFM2/2A GFM4/4A 70B29G01 70B29G

158 -18 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFM January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0624] Product Selection Order by catalog number or style number: 1 Basic GFM Unit 1 Plug if required 1 Mounting Bracket if required 1 Circuit Breaker with standard shunt trip factory installed (as required), or optionally when possible, a circuit breaker and field mountable shunt trip as separate items. Table -28. GFM Basic Units Output Type Approximate Window Opening, Inches Unit for Use with Standard Shunt Trip Relay Relay 2 4 Unit for Use with Flux Transfer Shunt Trips SCR SCR 2 4 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 1494 Basic Ampere (Plug Omitted) Operating 10 x Ampere 0.03 Seconds 0.03 Seconds 0.03 Seconds 0.03 Seconds GFM2 GFM4 GFM2A GFM4A 1,40. 1,8. 1,40. 1,8. Table GFM Optional Plugs Ampere GFMP10 GFMP2 GFMP0 GFMP7 GFMP

159 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [062] Internal Accessories Alarm Switch -19 Contents Description Page Internal Accessories Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Shunt Trip Low Energy Shunt Trip Undervoltage Release Mechanism Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits Make Break Alarm Switch Table F-Frame Electrical Data Max. Voltage For remote indication of automatic trip operation. Does not function with manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A make contact closes and a break contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Frequency Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers 20 0/60 Hz DC DC Single-Pole Circuit Breakers / Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Inductive (L/R = 0.026). Table J-Frame Electrical Data Max. Voltage 20 Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table K-Frame Electrical Data Max. Voltage 20 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Max. Current Amps Max. Current Amps Max. Current Amps Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Max. Voltage 20 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table N-Frame Electrical Data Max. Voltage 20 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table R-Frame Electrical Data Max. Voltage 20 Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Max. Current Amps Max. Current Amps Max. Current Amps Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 200 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are red, black and blue. Non-inductive load.

160 -160 Internal Accessories Alarm Switch January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0626] Table G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH only) Electrical Contact Arrangement Factory Volts Frequency Amperes Alarm Switch 240 0/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break 88C7G03 B3 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 240 0/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1a/1b 88C76G09 B13 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a 3-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of 2- or 3-pole breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 12. See Page Table E Alarm Switch Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes Contact Arrangement 20 0/60 DC DC M 1B 2M 2B ALM1M1BEPK ALM2M2BEPK Table -29. F-Frame Alarm Switch of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Left Right 2 Left Right 1 (Make Only) Single- Pole Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side B01 B0 B09 B B02 B06 B10 B13 B03 B07 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C180 B04 B08 B11 B14 A1L1LPK A1L1RPK A2L1LPK A2L1RPK B1 A1L1LTK A1L1RTK A2L1LTK A2L1RTK Table J20 Alarm Switch Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes Contact Arrangement 20 0/60 DC DC M 1B 2M 2B ALM1M1BEPK ALM2M2BEPK Table J-Frame Alarm Switch of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Left Right Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side B01 B0 B02 B06 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C181 B03 B07 B04 B08 A1L2LPK A1L2RPK A1L2LTK A1L2RTK ➆ Discount Symbol CB-2

161 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0627] Internal Accessories Alarm Switch -161 Table K-Frame Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right 2 Left Right B01 B0 B09 B B02 B06 B10 B13 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C182 B03 B07 B04 B08 B11 B14 A1L3LPK A1L3RPK A2L3LPK A2L3RPK A1L3LTK A1L3RTK A2L3LTK A2L3RTK Table L- and M-Frames Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Left Right 2 Left Right Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side B01 B0 B09 B B02 B06 B10 B13 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C183 B03 B07 B04 B08 B11 B14 A1L4LPK A1L4RPK A2L4LPK A2L4RPK A1L4LTK A1L4RTK A2L4LTK A2L4RTK Table N-Frame Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right 2 Left Right B01 B0 B09 B B02 B06 B10 B13 B03 B07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. B04 B08 B11 B14 A1LLPK A1LRPK A2LLPK A2LRPK A1LLTK A1LRTK A2LLTK A2LRTK Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C184 Table R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH only) of Contacts (Make and Break) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads 1 B A1L6RPK B 60. A2L6RPK 60. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C18

162 -162 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0628] Auxiliary Switch The Auxiliary Switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position a of the molded cross bar which contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for b remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one a and one b contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the a contact is open and the b contact is closed. Table F-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). For use in electronic circuit of micro-amperes and 1V DC minimum. Non-inductive load. Table J-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Frequency 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table -30. L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table N-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table R-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 200 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are red, black and blue. Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 200 Maximum Current Amperes Table K-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 20 0/60 Hz DC DC Endurance: 000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH only) Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory /60 Hz 0/60 Hz 6 6 1a/1b 2a/2b 88C74G03 88C73G03 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a 3-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of 2- or 3-pole breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 11 A3 A6 Table E Auxiliary Switch Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes Contact Arrangement 20 0/60 DC DC A 1B 2A 2B AUX1A1BPK AUX2A2BPK Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C13

163 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0629] Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch -163 Table F-Frame Auxiliary Switch of Contacts a and b Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right or Neutral 2 Left Right or Neutral A01 A1 A0 A18 A09 A21 A A23 A02 A16 A06 A19 A10 A22 A13 A24 A03 A17 A07 A20 A04 A08 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard pigtail lead exit location. V (Max.), 0/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of micro-amp and 1V DC minimum. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C0 A11 A14 A1X1PK E1X1PK A1X1PK A2X1LPK E2X1LPK A2X1RPK E2X1RPK 201. A1X1LTK A1X1RTK A2X1LTK A2X1RTK Table J20 Auxiliary Switch Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes 20 0/60 DC DC Contact Arrangement 1A 1B 2A 2B AUX1A1BPK AUX2A2BPK Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C13 Table -3. J-Frame Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts (1a and 1b) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Left Right 2 Left Right Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side A01 A0 A09 A A02 A06 A10 A13 A03 A07 A04 A08 A11 A14 A1X2PK A1X2PK A2X2PK A2X2PK A1X2LTK A1X2RTK A2X2LTK A2X2RTK Table K-Frame Auxiliary Switch of Mounting Factory Mounted Field Mounted Sets of Location Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits Contacts (Pole) 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block (1M and 1B) Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right 2 Left Right 3 Left Right A01 A0 A09 A A18 A17.. A02 A06 A10 A13 A03 A07 A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16.. A1X3PK A1X3PK A2X3PK A2X3PK A3X3LPK A3X3RPK A1X3LTK A1X3RTK A2X3LTK A2X3RTK A3X3LTK. A3X3RTK.

164 -164 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0630] Table L- and M-Frames Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts (1a and 1b) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right 2 Left Right 3 Left Right A01 A0 A09 A A18 A17.. A02 A06 A10 A13 A03 A07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16.. A1X4PK A1X4PK A2X4PK A2X4PK A3X4PK A3X4PK A1X4LTK A1X4RTK A2X4LTK A2X4RTK A3X4LTK 610. A3X4RTK 610. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C3 Table -31. N-Frame Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right 2 Left Right 3 Left Right A01 A0 A09 A A18 A17.. A02 A06 A10 A13 A03 A07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16.. A1XPK A1XPK A2XPK A2XPK A3XLPK A3XRPK A1XLTK A1XRTK A2XLTK A2XRTK A3XLTK 610. A3XRTK 610. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C4 Table R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH only) of Contacts (Make and Break) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads U.S. 2 A 60. A2X6RPK A A4X6RPK 900. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C

165 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0631] Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -16 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each listed in Tables -322 a -328 includes one Auxiliary Switch and One Alarm Switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch b combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Table F-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Table L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Endurance: 000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Table J-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 0/60 Hz DC DC Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Table N-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 20 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz DC DC Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. 0/60 Hz DC DC Table K-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 20 Endurance: 000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Non-inductive load. 0/60 Hz DC DC

166 -166 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0632] Table E Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes Contact Arrangement 20 0/60 DC DC A 1B and 1M 1B AUXALRMEPK Table F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Same Side Left Right C01 C04 C02 C0 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. Standard mounting location. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C180 C03 C06 AAL1LPK AAL1RPK AAL1LTK AAL1RTK Table J20 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz Amperes 20 0/60 DC DC Contact Arrangement 1A 1B and 1M 1B AUXALRMEPK Table -32. J-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts (1a and 1b and 1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right C01 C04 C02 C0 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C181 C03 C06 AAL2LPK AAL2RPK AAL2LTK AAL2RTK Table K-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts (1a and 1b and 1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left Right C01 C04 C02 C0 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C182 C03 C06 AAL3LPK AAL3RPK AAL3LTK AAL3RTK

167 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0633] Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -167 Table L- and M-Frames Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break 2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break 3A, 3B and 1 Make/1 Break Left Right Left Right Left Right C01 C04 C07 C10 C14 C C02 C0 C08 C11 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker C03 C06 C C AA114LPK AA114RPK AA214LPK AA214RPK AA314LPK AA314RPK AA114LTK AA114RTK AA214LTK 0. AA214RTK 0. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C183 Table N-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break 2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break Mounting Location (Pole) Left Right Left Right Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C184 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side C01 C04 C07 C C02 C0 C08 C C03 C06 C C AA11LPK AA11RPK AA21LPK AA21RPK AA11LTK AA11RTK AA21LTK 610. AA21RTK 610.

168 -168 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0634] Shunt Trip The Shunt Trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a ST a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips, as noted in the Electrical Table, are suitable for operation at percent of rated voltage. Select shunt trip for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table F-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Table K-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Table J-Frame Electrical Data Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits /60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. Table L- and M-Frame Electrical Data Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits /60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA

169 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [063] Internal Accessories Shunt Trip -169 Table N-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits Table R-Frame Electrical Data Application s Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Electrical Operating s Supply Voltage (V) Minimum Operating Voltage (V) I p (A) I rms at 0.20s (A) I rms at 0.033s (A) VA One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 03/03K 24 0/ DC /0K / /11K➆ / /14K / DC /18K 480-0/ /23K DC /26K 110- DC Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage. Endurance: 00 electrical operations and 200 mechanical operations. Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. Maximum operating voltage 110% of maximum voltage range rating. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are yellow and white

170 -170 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0636] Table -33. G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH 3-Pole only) Electrical s Volts Frequency Amp 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz DC DC 60 Hz D62G D62G D62G1 1373D62G D62G20 S1 S2 S3 S4 S7 Note: G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 10 Table E Shunt Trip Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz /60, DC 0/60, DC 0/60 Suitable for use in ground fault applications. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C12 SNT060CPK SNT0CPK SNT480CPK Table F-Frame Shunt Trip Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 7V AC or 48 60V DC V AC or 110 7V DC 41 V AC or V DC S01 S0 S09 S13 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 7V AC or 48 60V DC V AC or 110 7V DC 41 V AC or V DC S17 S21 S2 S29 S02 S06 S10 S14 S18 S22 S26 S30 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Standard pigtail lead exit location. 0V AC marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. Standard mounting location. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C140 S03 S07 S11 S1 S19 S23 S27 S31 S04 S08 S S16 S20 S24 S28 S32 SNT1LP03K SNT1LP08K SNT1LPK SNT1LP18K SNT1RP03K SNT1RP08K SNT1RPK SNT1RP18K SNT1LT03K SNT1LT08K SNT1LTK SNT1LT18K SNT1RT03K SNT1RT08K SNT1RTK SNT1RT18K Table J20 Shunt Trip Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz /60, DC 0/60, DC 0/60 SNT060CPK SNT0CPK SNT480CPK Suitable for use in ground fault applications. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C12 Discount Symbol CB-2

171 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0637] Internal Accessories Shunt Trip -171 Table J-Frame Shunt Trip Voltage (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC or DC V AC or 110-V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC Listed with Underwiters Laboratories, Inc. for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C142 Table K-Frame Shunt Trip Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side S41 S49 S09 S13 S17 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC or DC V AC or 110-V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC Voltage (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC or DC V AC or 110 V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC S4 S3 S29 S33 S37 S42 S0 S10 S14 S18 S46 S4 S30 S34 S38 S43 S1 S11 S1 S19 S47 S S31 S3 S39 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C144 S44 S2 S S16 S20 S48 S6 S32 S36 S40 SNT2P04K SNT2P06K SNT2P11K SNT2P14K SNT2P18K SNT2P04K SNT2P06K SNT2P11K SNT2P14K SNT2P18K SNT2T04K SNT2T06K SNT2T11K SNT2T14K SNT2T18K SNT2T04K SNT2T06K SNT2T11K SNT2T14K SNT2T18K Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side S41 S49 S09 S33 S17 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC or DC V AC or 110 V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC S4 S3 S29 S33 S37 S42 S0 S10 S34 S18 S46 S4 S30 S34 S38 S43 S1 S11 S3 S19 S47 S S31 S3 S39 S44 S2 S S36 S20 S48 S6 S32 S36 S40 SNT3P04K SNT3P06K SNT3P11K SNT3P14K SNT3P18K SNT3P04K SNT3P06K SNT3P11K SNT3P14K SNT3P18K SNT3T04K SNT3T06K SNT3T11K SNT3T14K SNT3T18K SNT3T04K SNT3T06K SNT3T11K SNT3T14K SNT3T18K

172 -172 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0638] Table L- and M-Frames Shunt Trip Voltage (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V DC 48 60V DC V AC 110 V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side S01 S0 S8 S09 S41 S13 S17 Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 24V AC or DC 48 60V DC 48 60V DC V AC 110 V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC S21 S2 S88 S29 S4 S33 S37 S02 S06 S86 S10 S42 S14 S18 S22 S26 S89 S30 S46 S34 S38 S03 S07 S87 S11 S43 S1 S19 S23 S27 S90 S31 S47 S3 S39 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) 3-pole trip units only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C146 S04 S08 S S44 S16 S20 S24 S28 S32 S48 S36 S40 SNT4LP03K SNT4LP0K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP18K SNT4RP03K SNT4RP0K SNT4RP23K SNT4RP11K SNT4RP26K SNT4RP14K SNT4RP18K SNT4LT03K SNT4LT0K SNT4LT23K SNT4LT11K SNT4LT26K SNT4LT14K SNT4LT18K SNT4RT03K SNT4RT0K SNT4RT23K SNT4RT11K SNT4RT26K SNT4RT14K SNT4RT18K Table N-Frame Shunt Trip Voltage (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 9 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC V AC 110 V DC V AC or V DC 480 V AC 48 60V DC Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C148 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side S01 S0 S09 S41 S13 S17 S21 S02 S06 S10 S42 S14 S18 S22 S03 S07 S11 S43 S1 S19 S23 S04 S08 S S44 S16 S20 S24 SNTLP03K SNTLP0K SNTLP11K SNTLP26K SNTLP14K SNTLP18K SNTLP23K SNTLT03K SNTLT0K SNTLT11K SNTLT26K SNTLT14K SNTLT18K SNTLT23K Table R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only) Voltage Factory Mounted (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads 24V AC or DC 48 60V AC V AC V AC or V DC 480 V AC 48 60V DC 110 V DC S21 S2 S29 S33 S37 S88 S SNT6P03K SNT6P0K SNT6P11K SNT6P14K SNT6P18K SNT6P23K SNT6P26K Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C

173 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0639] Internal Accessories Low Energy Shunt Trip -173 Low Energy Shunt Trip Low Energy Shunt Trip devices are designed to UV operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a microfarad capacitor charged to 28V DC is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Ordering Information Select shunt trip for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames Low Energy Shunt Trip Mounting Positions (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED s 29C141 (F-Frame); 29C143 (J-Frame); 29C14 (K-Frame); 29C147 (L- and M-Frames); 29C149 (N-Frame); and 29C11 (R-Frame) F-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO2 NO6 NO3 NO7 NO4 NO8 LST1LPK LST1RPK LST1LTK LST1RTK J-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO2 NO6 NO3 NO7 LST2LPK LST2RPK K-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO2 NO6 NO3 NO7 LST3LPK LST3RPK L- and M-Frames Left Right NO1 NO NO2 NO6 NO3 NO7 LST4LPK LST4RPK N-Frame Left NO1 NO2 NO3 LSTLPK R-Frame Right NO1 LST6RPK 710.

174 -174 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0640] Undervoltage Release Mechanism The Undervoltage Release Mechanism monitors a UV voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 3 percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table -34. F-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Endurance: 0 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. VA Table J-Frame Electrical Data Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 2,000 mechanical operations. For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Cutler-Hammer /60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage VA Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max VA

175 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0641] Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -17 Table K-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. VA Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations Table L- and M-Frames Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. VA Endurance: 000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations Table N-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. VA Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 0 mechanical operations

176 -176 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0642] Table -30. R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s Application s Voltage (V) Electrical Operating s Supply Voltage (V) Dropout Voltage (V) Min. Max. Pickup Voltage (V) Max. Approximate Operating Time (ms) VA Min.➂ UVR Response Initiation➃ Circuit Breaker Contact Separation Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening Dielectric➄ Withstand Voltage (V) 02/02K /03K /0K /08K /11K /29K Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 200 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are orange and brown. UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. For 1 minute. Table -31. R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s Application s Voltage (V) Electrical Operating s Supply Voltage (V) Dropout Voltage (V) Min. Max. Pickup Voltage (V) Max Approximate Operating Time (ms) VA Min. UVR Response Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 20/20K /21K /23K /26K /28K Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 200 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are orange and brown. UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. For 1 minute Table -32. G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH 3-Pole only) Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz 0/60 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz Style s 1373D62G D62G D62G0 1373D62G D62G D62G D62G D62G D62G D62G 1373D62G D62G14 Factory T1 T2 T3 T4 T T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T Includes 24 inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a 3-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in left pole only of 3-pole breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 13 Note: G-frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Discount Symbol CB-2

177 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0643] Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -177 Table -33. E Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz /60, DC 0/60, DC 0/60 DC 0/60 DC 0/60 DC 0/60 0/60 UVR0CPK UVR024CPK UVR048APK UVR048DPK UVR0APK UVRDPK UVR240APK UVR20DPK UVR480APK UVRAPK Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C1 Table -34. F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Connection Type and Location (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) 18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC U01 U02 U03 U04 24V AC U0 U06 U07 U08 48V AC U37 U38 U39 U40 60V AC U97 U98 U99 U 110 7V AC U13 U14 U1 U V AC U17 U18 U19 U V AC U21 U22 U23 U24 2 V AC U2 U26 U27 U28 Right-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48V AC 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC 2 V AC Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC Right-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC U49 U3 U8 U101 U61 U6 U69 U73 U29 U33 U37 U97 U41 U4 U77 U81 U8 U101 U89 U93 U0 U4 U86 U102 U62 U66 U70 U74 U30 U34 U38 U98 U42 U46 U78 U82 U86 U102 U90 U94 Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C160 and 29C179 (HMCP) Note: F-frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. U1 U U87 U103 U63 U67 U71 U7 U31 U3 U39 U99 U43 U47 U79 U83 U87 U103 U91 U9 U2 U6 U88 U104 U64 U68 U72 U76 U32 U36 U40 U U44 U48 U80 U84 U88 U104 U92 U96 Discount Symbol CB-2

178 -178 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0644] Table -3. F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC UVH1LP02K UVH1LT02K MUVH1LP02K MUVH1LT02K 24V AC UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K 48V AC UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K 60V AC UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K 110 7V AC UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K V AC UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K V AC UVH1LP1K UVH1LT1K MUVH1LP1K MUVH1LT1K 2 V AC UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48V AC 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC 2 V AC Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC Right-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC UVH1RP02K UVH1RP03K UVH1RP22K UVH1RP24K UVH1RP08K UVH1RP11K UVH1RP1K UVH1RP18K UVH1LP20K UVH1LP21K UVH1LP22K UVH1LP24K UVH1LP26K UVH1LP28K UVH1RP20K UVH1RP21K UVH1RP22K UVH1RP22K UVH1RP26K UVH1RP28K UVH1RT02K UVH1RT03K UVH1RT22K UVH1RT24K UVH1RT08K UVH1RT11K UVH1RT1K UVH1RT18K UVH1LT20K UVH1LT21K UVH1LT22K UVH1LT24K UVH1LT26K UVH1LT28K UVH1RT20K UVH1RT21K UVH1RT22K UVH1RT22K UVH1RT26K UVH1RT28K Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard mounting location. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C160 and 29C179 (HMCP) MUVH1RP02K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RP24K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RP1K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1LP20K MUVH1LP21K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LP26K MUVH1LP28K MUVH1RP20K MUVH1RP21K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RP26K MUVH1RP28K MUVH1RT02K MUVH1RT03K MUVH1RT22K MUVH1RT24K MUVH1RT08K MUVH1RT11K MUVH1RT1K MUVH1RT18K MUVH1LT20K MUVH1LT21K MUVH1LT22K MUVH1LT24K MUVH1LT26K MUVH1LT28K MUVH1RT20K MUVH1RT21K MUVH1RT22K MUVH1RT22K MUVH1RT26K MUVH1RT28K Table -36. J20 Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical s Volts Frequency Hz /60, DC 0/60, DC 0/60 DC 0/60 DC 0/60 DC 0/60 0/60 UVR0CPK UVR024CPK UVR048APK UVR048DPK UVR0APK UVRDPK UVR240APK UVR20DPK UVR480APK UVRAPK Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C1 Discount Symbol CB-2

179 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [064] Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -179 Table -37. J-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U0 U09 U13 U17 U21 U2 Right-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U37 U41 U4 U49 U3 U7 Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T01 T0 T09 T13 T17 Right-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T21 T2 T29 T33 T37 U06 U10 U14 U18 U22 U26 U38 U42 U46 U0 U4 U8 T02 T06 T10 T14 T18 T22 T26 T30 T34 T38 U07 U11 U1 U19 U23 U27 U39 U43 U47 U1 U U9 T03 T07 T11 T1 T19 T23 T27 T31 T3 T39 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Cutler-Hammer. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breakers. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C163 U08 U U16 U20 U24 U28 U40 U44 U48 U2 U6 U60 T04 T08 T T16 T20 T24 T28 T32 T36 T40 UVH2LP02K UVH2LP03K UVH2LP0K UVH2LP08K UVH2LP11K UVH2LP1K UVH2RP02K UVH2RP03K UVH2RP0K UVH2RP08K UVH2RP11K UVH2RP1K UVH2LP20K UVH2LP21K UVH2LP23K UVH2LP26K UVH2LP28K UVH2RP20K UVH2RP21K UVH2RP23K UVH2RP26K UVH2RP28K UVH2LT02K UVH2LT03K UVH2LT0K UVH2LT08K UVH2LT11K UVH2LT1K UVH2RT02K UVH2RT03K UVH2RT0K UVH2RT08K UVH2RT11K UVH2RT1K UVH2LT20K UVH2LT21K UVH2LT23K UVH2LT26K UVH2LT28K UVH2RT20K UVH2RT21K UVH2RT23K UVH2RT26K UVH2RT28K

180 -180 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0646] Table -38. K-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C166 Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U0 U09 U13 U17 U21 U2 Right-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U37 U41 U4 U49 U3 U7 Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T01 T0 T09 T13 T17 Right-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T21 T2 T29 T33 T37 U06 U10 U14 U18 U22 U26 U38 U42 U46 U0 U4 U8 T02 T06 T10 T14 T18 T22 T26 T30 T34 T38 U07 U11 U1 U19 U23 U27 U39 U43 U47 U1 U U9 T03 T07 T11 T1 T19 T23 T27 T31 T3 T39 U08 U U16 U20 U24 U28 U40 U44 U48 U2 U6 U60 T04 T08 T T16 T20 T24 T28 T32 T36 T40 UVH3LP02K UVH3LP03K UVH3LP0K UVH3LP08K UVH3LP11K UVH3LP1K UVH3RP02K UVH3RP03K UVH3RP0K UVH3RP08K UVH3RP11K UVH3RP1K UVH3LP20K UVH3LP21K UVH3LP23K UVH3LP26K UVH3LP28K UVH3RP20K UVH3RP21K UVH3RP23K UVH3RP26K UVH3RP28K UVH3LT02K UVH3LT03K UVH3LT0K UVH3LT08K UVH3LT11K UVH3LT1K UVH3RT02K UVH3RT03K UVH3RT0K UVH3RT08K UVH3RT11K UVH3RT1K UVH3LT20K UVH3LT21K UVH3LT23K UVH3LT26K UVH3LT28K UVH3RT20K UVH3RT21K UVH3RT23K UVH3RT26K UVH3RT28K

181 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0647] Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -181 Table -39. L- and M-Frames Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C170 Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U0 U09 U13 U17 U21 U2 Right-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U37 U41 U4 U49 U3 U7 Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T01 T0 T09 T13 T17 Right-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T21 T2 T29 T33 T37 U06 U10 U14 U18 U22 U26 U38 U42 U46 U0 U4 U8 T02 T06 T10 T14 T18 T22 T26 T30 T34 T38 U07 U11 U1 U19 U23 U27 U39 U43 U47 U1 U U9 T03 T07 T11 T1 T19 T23 T27 T31 T3 T39 U08 U U16 U20 U24 U28 U40 U44 U48 U2 U6 U60 T04 T08 T T16 T20 T24 T28 T32 T36 T40 UVH4LP02K UVH4LP03K UVH4LP0K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP11K UVH4LP1K UVH4RP02K UVH4RP03K UVH4RP0K UVH4RP08K UVH4RP11K UVH4RP1K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP23K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP28K UVH4RP20K UVH4RP21K UVH4RP23K UVH4RP26K UVH4RP28K 46. UVH4LT02K UVH4LT03K UVH4LT0K UVH4LT08K UVH4LT11K UVH4LT1K UVH4RT02K UVH4RT03K UVH4RT0K UVH4RT08K UVH4RT11K UVH4RT1K UVH4LT20K UVH4LT21K UVH4LT23K UVH4LT26K UVH4LT28K UVH4RT20K UVH4RT21K UVH4RT23K UVH4RT26K UVH4RT28K Table N-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (AC Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C174 Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC s V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC U0 U09 U13 U17 U21 U2 Left-Pole Mounting DC s V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 7V DC V DC T01 T0 T09 T13 T17 U06 U10 U14 U18 U22 U26 T02 T06 T10 T14 T18 U07 U11 U1 U19 U23 U27 T03 T07 T11 T1 T19 U08 U U16 U20 U24 U28 T04 T08 T T16 T20 UVHLP02K UVHLP03K UVHLP0K UVHLP08K UVHLP11K UVHLP29K UVHLP20K UVHLP21K UVHLP23K UVHLP26K UVHLP28K UVHLT02K UVHLT03K UVHLT0K UVHLT08K UVHLT11K UVHLT29K UVHLT20K UVHLT21K UVHLT23K UVHLT26K UVHLT28K

182 -182 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0648] Table R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Voltage (AC Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads V AC 24V AC 48 60V AC 110 7V AC V AC V AC V DC 24V DC 48 60V DC 110 V DC V DC U37 U41 U4 U49 U3 U7 T21 T2 T29 T33 T Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 200 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ). Leads are orange and brown. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C178 UVH6RP02K UVH6RP03K UVH6RP0K UVH6RP08K UVH6RP11K UVH6RP29K UVH6RP20K UVH6RP21K UVH6RP23K UVH6RP26K UVH6RP28K

183 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0649] Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For Fixed Mounted Configuration) Internal Accessories Accessory Terminal Block Table of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Type of Accessory Auxiliary Switch Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout Switch of Contacts per Single Accessory 2a/2b 4a/4b 1m/1b 2m/2b Shunt Trip N/A 2 Low Energy Shunt N/A 2 Undervoltage Release Mechanism N/A 2 Required of Wires Table R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block Factory Installed Field Mounted Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed mounted Accessory Terminal Blocks are available. A maximum of one 24-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories. For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Table Q01 TBRDK 2. One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 29C714). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C3

184 -184 Internal Accessories PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [060] Cutler-Hammer PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 0 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Table PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits Circuit Breaker PowerNet Factory Install Zone Interlocking/ Ground Factory Install PowerNet & Zone Interlocking/Ground Factory Install K-Frame L-Frame N-Frame ICK0K ICK0L ICK0N PN PN PN ZGK0K ZGK0L ZGK0N Includes a ground fault alarm signal which can drive the Ground Fault Alarm unit ( GFAU). Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED s (K) 29C06, (L) 29C897, (N) 29C898 ZG ZG ZG ZGPK0K ZGPK0L ZGPK0N ZGP ZGP ZGP Figure -31. PowerNet Communication Kit The Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add Cutler-Hammer PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 0 breaker in the field. An 18-inch wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for Cutler-Hammer PowerNet and two wires for 24V DC (4 ma load). It is recommended that the power supply be an isolated high quality unit.

185 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [061] External Accessories Termination Hardware -18 Contents Description Page External Accessories Termination Hardware Base Mounting Hardware Drawout Cassette Terminal Shields and End Covers Base Mounting Adapters Handle Locking and Blocking Devices Mechanical Interlocking Devices Electrical Operator Plug-In Adapters Rear Connecting Studs Panelboard Connecting Straps Handle Mechanisms Current Limiters, Alarms, Monitors and Test Kits OPTIM System Components End Cap Kit Figure -32. End Cap Kit The End Cap Kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Table -36. End Cap Kit Ordering Information Thread Type F-Frame Imperial Metric J-Frame Imperial Metric K-Frame Imperial Metric L-Frame Imperial Metric Thread Size M M M M-8 KPEK1 KPEKM1 KPEK2 KPEKM2 KPEK3 KPEKM3 KPEK4 KPEKM Keeper Nut The Keeper Nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Table F-Frame Keeper Nut Ordering Information Thread Type Imperial Metric Figure -33. F-Frame Keeper Nut Table K-Frame Keeper Nut Ordering Information Thread Type Thread Size M- Thread Size Package of (d Individually) KPR1A KPR1AM Line/ Load End Imperial Line Load Metric M-8 Line Load Package of 3 KPR3A KPR3B KPR3AM KPR3BM Figure -34. K-Frame Keeper Nut L-, M-, N-Frames Not required. Terminals are threaded. Discount Symbol CB-2

186 -186 External Accessories Termination Hardware January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [062] Plug Nut Control Wire Terminal Kit Table G-Frame Control Wire Terminal Description Control Wire Terminal (Kit of ) 62B38G01 GCWTK.1 F-Frame Ordering Information Package of control wire terminal tangs. Terminals must be ordered separately. d individually. Table F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Max. Amperes FCWTK FCWTK Figure -3. J-Frame Plug Nut The Plug Nut is used in applications where screw-connected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. Table J-Frame Plug Nut Ordering Information Thread Type Imperial Metric Thread Size M-6 Terminal Adapter Package of 6 PLN2 PLN2M Table K-Frame Terminal Adapter Ordering Information Line/Load End Line & Load TAD K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. Figure -36. K-Frame Terminal Adapter Figure -37. F-Frame Kit The Control Wire Terminal Kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Figure -38. J- and K-Frame Kit Table L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Ordering Information AWG Wire Range/ Conductors Al/Cu (2) kcmil Cu (2) 3/0 30 kcmil Al/Cu (2) kcmil Al/Cu (2) kcmil Al/Cu (2) kcmil Metric Wire Range mm 2 Not for use with T20KB terminals. J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Package of control wire terminal tangs. Terminals must be ordered separately. d individually. Table J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Ordering Information Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. KCWTK TA602LDCW➁ T602LDCW➁ TA603LDKCW 2-Pole Kit TA603LDKCW 3-Pole Kit TA603LDKCW 4-Pole Kit

187 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [063] External Accessories Multiwire Connectors -187 Multiwire Connectors Field-installed Multiwire Connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed for copper only as used on the load side (OFF) end. Table Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes G-Frame F-Frame J-Frame K-Frame Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu /0 14-2/6 Kit 3TAG3K 3TAG6K 3TA10F3K 3TA10F6K 3TA20J3K 3TA20J6K 3TA400K3K 3TA400K6K Figure -39. Multiwire Connectors

188 -188 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [064] Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Table -37. Mounting Hardware Screw Length Inches (mm) G-Frame x 2.62 (66.7 mm) Std x (76.2 mm) 624B37G C80G Table Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware of Poles F-Frame Description x inch Pan-Head Steel Screws, Lockwashers,and Clamps x 1.-inch Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers 3, x 1.-inch Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers J-Frame 2, 3, x 2.7 inch Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers K-Frame 2, 3, x 1. inch Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers L-Frame 2, 3, x 1. inch Filister-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers and Flat Washers M-Frame 2, x 1.2 inch Filister-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers and Flat Washers N-Frame 2, 3, x 1.2 inch Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers R-Frame Table Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Type of Mounting Individual Group (one set of hardware for two circuit breakers) 624B37G01 624B37G Individual 4218B80G Individual BMH Individual BMH2 7.2 Individual BMH3 8.2 Individual BMH Individual BMH Individual BMH Supplied by customer of Poles F-Frame Description 1 M4 0.7 x 80 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws, Lockwashers, and Clamps 2 M4 0.7 x 38 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers 3, 4 M4 0.7 x 38 mm Pan-Head SteelScrews and Lockwashers J-Frame 2, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 70mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers K-Frame 2, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 38mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers L-Frame Type of Mounting Individual Group (one set of hardware for two circuit breakers) 4218B80G B80G Individual 4218B80G Individual BMH1M 6.20 Individual BMH2M 7.2 Individual BMH3M 8.2 2, 3 Individual BMH4M 9.30 M-Frame 2, 3 Individual BMHM N-Frame 2, 3 Individual BMHM R-Frame Supplied by customer

189 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [06] External Accessories Drawout Cassette -189 Drawout Cassette Product Description The Drawout Cassette is currently for use with the standard 3-pole 6 ka/ 480V AC, 1A and 2000A RD circuit breakers only. It consists of two separate components: the movable mechanism which is factory mounted to the circuit breaker frame (shown in figure) and the stationary mechanism which is housed in the cassette and shipped separately. The drawout mechanism has four positions. Connected The breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts. Test The breaker is not connected to the primary stab but is connected to the secondary contacts. Disconnected Both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected. Withdraw The breaker can be removed from the cassette. Table RD Drawout Cassette Ordering Information Description 6 ka/480v AC Version Movable Mechanism Stationary Mechanism ka/480v AC Version Movable Mechanism Stationary Mechanism RD20DOM 3,90. RD20DOS (without shutters) RD20DOSS (with shutters) 3,90. 4,02. RD20DOM 3,90. RD20DOS (without shutters) RD20DOSS (with shutters) 3,90. 4,02. List price shown is adder to breaker price. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Movable mechanism must be ordered with RD or RDC circuit breaker and is shipped mounted to circuit breaker frame. Stationary mechanism is ordered separately. All internal accessories must be factory installed for use with drawout. Discount Symbol CB-2

190 -190 External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [066] Terminal Shields Terminal Shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.) Table G-Frame Terminal Shield Units in Package 10 GTSK F-Frame Table F-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles Location Standard (Package of 10) (d Individually) Special For use when electrical operator is mounted on circuit breaker Line 62B229G06 62B229G07 62B229G08 62B229G B9G B9G J-Frame Table J-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles 2,3 4 2,3 4 Location Line End Load End (Package of 10) 66C07G C01G C16G C16G L-Frame Table L-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 314C420G K-Frame Table K-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles 2, Location Line Line Load (Package of 10) TS33LN TS34LN TS33LD M-Frame Table M-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 208B966G Discount Symbol CB-2

191 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [067] Terminal End Covers External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for 3-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. Table -38. F-Frame Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm) (6.3 mm) 0.41 (10.41 mm) TEC1 TEC F-Frame Product Description The Terminal End Covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glass-polyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.2-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41-inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Table Interphase Barriers Frame F J, K L M N IPB1 IPB3 IPB4 IPB4 IPB Discount Symbol CB-2

192 -192 External Accessories Base Mounting Adapters January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [068] Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting (6) single-pole circuit breakers. Table Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GC/GHC Ordering Information Units in Package 1 207B13G DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard 3 mm DIN Rail such as, 3 x 7. or 3 x 1 mm per DIN EN0022. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with 2- and 3-pole circuit breakers. Adapters for 1-pole circuit breakers (pictured above) clip into the base molding. Table DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GC/GHC Ordering Information Poles Units in Package Key Operated Attachment Table Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GC/GHC Ordering Information Units in Package Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C090 Figure -40. Key Operated Attachment 10 GK0A Pole 3-Pole C79G C79G For use on 3-pole breakers only. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED (1-2P) 142 and (3P) 29C091 Discount Symbol CB-2

193 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [069] External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices -193 Lock Dog (non-padlockable) Padlockable Handle Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Table G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GB/GHB/ GMCP Ordering Information Units in Package Non-padlockable Handle Block 1 94C01H Table G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GB/GHB Ordering Information Units in Package Accepts.28 Lock Shank Padlockable in the OFF position only. 23C77G C77G Padlockable Handle Block The Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the 1-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Table Ordering Information Frame F PHL The Non-padlockable Handle Block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one /16 padlock. Table Ordering Information Frame J, K PHB Table Ordering Information Frame F J, K L, M, N LKD1 LKD3 LKD Discount Symbol CB-2

194 -194 External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0660] Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Table -39. Ordering Information Description F-Frame 1-pole breakers PHL , 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK J, K-Frames 2-, 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK For Left Side Mounting PLK3LOFF 37.7 For Right Side PLK3ROFF 37.7 Mounting L-Frame (Side Mounted) Side Mounted Lock ON or OFF HLK Lock OFF Only HLK4LOFF 49.0 (Left-Hand Mount) L-Frame (Top Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4S 49.0 Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF 49.0 M-Frame Lock ON or OFF HLK Lock OFF Only HLK4LOFF 49.0 (Left-Hand Mount) M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) Lock ON/OFF HLK4S 49.0 Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF 49.0 N-Frame Side Mounted PLK Top Mounted (ON/OFF) PLKS Top Mounted PLKSOFF (OFF Only) R-Frame Lock ON/OFF HLK Lock OFF Only HLK6OFF For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only order either. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C230 (F-Frame); 29C232 (J-, K-Frames); 29C234 (Side Mounted L-Frame and N- Frame, M-Frame); 29C234C (Top Mounted L-Frame and N-Frame, Vertical Mounting M-Frame); and 29C240 (R-Frame). Cylinder Lock The Cylinder Lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Table Ordering Information Frame F, J, K Order by description Discount Symbol CB-2

195 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0661] External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices -19 Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The Key Interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL file E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Ordering Information Key interlock mounting kits are for field installation only. Select mounting kit s to match type of lock used. Key interlocks are supplied by customer. Table Ordering Information Lock Manufacturer Lock Type Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position inches (mm) F-Frame Superior Kirk Square D Federal Pioneer B F SF VF.38 (9.).38 (9.) None.38 (9.) Kit Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C231 (F-Frame); 29C233 (J-, K-Frames); 29C23 (L-, M-, N-Frames); and 29C240 (R-Frame) KYK Castell K or QK.38 (9.) CTK J, K-Frames Superior Kirk Square D Federal Pioneer Castell L-, M-, N-Frame Superior Kirk Square D Federal Pioneer B F SF VF K or QK B F SF VF.38 (9.).38 (9.) None.38 (9.).38 (9.).38 (9.).38 (9.) None.38 (9.) KYK KYK Castell K or QK.38 (9.) CTK R-Frame Superior Kirk Square D Federal Pioneer B F SF VF 1.0 (2.4) 1.0 (2.4) 1.0 (2.4) 1.0 (2.4) KYK6 24. Castell K or QK 1.0 (2.4) CTK6 24. Discount Symbol CB-2

196 -196 External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0662] Sliding Bar Interlock The Sliding Bar Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent 3-pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.) Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent 3- pole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline spacing as indicated in Table Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information Frame Centerline Spacing in Inches (mm) F J K L, M N 4.19 (106.4) 4.38 (111.1).7 (146.0) 8.0 (21.9) 8.0 (21.9) SBK1 SBK2 SBK3 SBK4 SBK Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either 2-, 3- or 4-pole circuit breakers). table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.) Instruction Leaflet/ FRED 29C310 29C310 29C310 29C311 46A8396 With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately. Table Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information Frame Instruction Leaflet/ FRED The Walking Beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E3816. F K L, M N R WBL1 WBL3 WBL4A WBL WBL C300 29C301 29C302 29C303 29C304 Discount Symbol CB-2

197 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0663] External Accessories Electrical Operator -197 Electrical Operator Table - F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Maximum Operating Time Fuse Amperes EO /60 Hz AC 10 cycles (80 ms) Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL file E Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Use current-limiting type fuse where required. The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 10,000 electrical operations. 3 2 Product Description The Electrical (Solenoid) Operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bistable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of cycles (80 ms), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The Data Tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator. The Electrical (Motor) Operator allows the circuit s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The Electrical (Motor) Operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor. Table F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Voltage Frequency Terminal Block 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Lead AC EOP1T07 EOP1T11 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C200 Table F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL File E644. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 4,000 electrical operations. Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Table F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C206A Table J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL file E The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: cycles (80 ms). Table -40. J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator EOP1P07 EOP1P11 Voltage (V) Frequency Inrush Current Amperes 0 AC DC 3 2 Voltage (V) Frequency 18-Inch (47.2 mm) Pigtail Lead 0 0/60 Hz AC MOP1P DC MOP1P03DC MOP1P0DC MOP1P07DC Voltage (V) Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A) Operating Voltage Frequency Terminal Block /60 Hz AC EOP2T07 EOP2T11 2,38. 2,38. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C202 Discount Symbol CB-2

198 -198 External Accessories Electrical Operator January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0664] Table K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Voltage (V) Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A) Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL file E The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: cycles (80 ms). Table K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Operating Voltage Frequency Terminal Block Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C202 Table K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Frame Table L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL File E The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: cycles (80 ms). Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Table L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C /60 Hz AC EOP3T07 EOP3T11 2,7. 2,7. K BBMK3 13. Voltage (V) 0 AC DC 24 Operating Voltage (V) Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Terminal Block 0/60 Hz EOP4MT07 EOP4MT11 EOP4MT11A EOP4MT1 DC EOP4MT26 EOP4MT21 3,440. 3,440. 3,440. 3,440. 3,440. 3,440. Table N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Voltage (V) Frequency Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A) Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL File E Frequency: 0/60 Hz. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,00 electrical operations. Maximum operating time: cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Table -4. N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Operating Voltage (V) /60 Hz DC Frequency Pigtail Leads 0/60 Hz EOPT07 EOPT09 EOPT11 EOPT1 DC EOPT22 EOPT26 Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C204 Table R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON 1/2 second max. (b) To turn breaker OFF 1/2 second max. Motor operating temperature; Class A temperature limits apply. A minimum 1 kva power source is recommended for motor operation. Applied voltage should be no less than 8% or no more than 110% of rated. Table R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C ,870. 3,870. 3,870. 3,870. 3,870. 3,870. Voltage (V) Frequency Motor Inrush Current (A) Operating Voltage /60 Hz 0/60 Hz DC Frequency 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz DC Factory Installed Terminal Block EOP6T08K EOP6T11K EOP6T21K 4,280. 4,280. 4,280.

199 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [066] Plug-in Adapters External Accessories Plug-in Adapters Table -41. F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole D13G D13G D13G Mounting Plate 176C11H C047H01 0. A maximum. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Table J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) Terminal End 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole Product Description Plug-in Adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on 2-, 3- and 4-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for line- and load-end adapters are available. One Plug-in Adapter Kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. 20 Line Load 1 Line and 1 Load Mounting Plate Use 3-pole mounting plate for 2-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Table K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) 60C86G0 60C86G07 06C144G Use 3-pole mounting plate for 2-pole circuit breaker. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED C86G06 60C86G08 06C144G , C67G01 31C67G02.. PMP Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 400 PAD32 PAD PAD34. Mounting Plate PMP Table L-Frame Ordering Information (Threaded Stud Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) 2-Pole 3-Pole 06C09G C09G04 1,000. Mounting Plate 04C824H C824H Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C314. Table M-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) 2-Pole 3-Pole D3G0 1, D3G04 2,000. Mounting Plate 90C73H C73H01 0. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Table N-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) 2-Pole 3-Pole D3G03 1, D3G04 2,000. Mounting Plate 90C73H C73H01 0. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED Discount Symbol CB-2

200 -200 External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0666] Rear Connecting Studs Product Description Rear Connecting Studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixed-mounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes. Mounting Panel B E Breaker Mounting Surface F Thread.7 (19.1).06 (1.) A C D Figure -41. F-Frame Table F-Frame Ordering Information Stud Ampere Stud For 1A to A Circuit Breakers A Short A Short A Short A Short A Long A Long A Long A Long 41D874G01 41D874G01 41D874G01 41D874G01 41D874G02 41D874G02 41D874G02 41D874G02 For 110A to 10A Circuit Breakers 10A Short 10A Short 10A Short 10A Short 10A Long 10A Long 10A Long 10A Long 374D883G01 374D883G01 374D883G01 374D883G01 374D883G02 374D883G02 374D883G02 374D883G Panel Thickness in Inches (mm) Tube Length in Inches (mm) Tube Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D E F 1.00 (2.4) (17. to 23.8) (9. to 1.9).2.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (2.4) (17. to 23.8) (9. to 1.9).2.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (2.4) (17. to 23.8) (9. to 1.9).2.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (2.4) (17. to 23.8) (9. to 1.9).2.31 (6.4 to 7.9).69 (17.) 1.38 (34.9) 1.69 (42.9) 2.00 (0.8).69 (17.) 1.38 (34.9) 1.69 (42.9) 2.00 (0.8) 3.44 (87.3) 3.7 (9.2) 4.06 (103.1) 4.38 (111.3) 3.44 (87.3) 3.7 (9.2) 4.06 (103.1) 4.38 (111.3) 32B9446H20 32B9446H21 32B9446H22 32B9446H23 32B9446H24 32B9446H2 32B9446H26 32B9446H27 374D883H06 374D883H07 374D883H08 374D883H09 374D883H10 374D883H11 374D883H 374D883H (1.6) 7.0 (190.) 3.63 (92.1).31 (7.9) (108.0).44 (11.1) 14

201 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0667] External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs -201 Table J-Frame Ordering Information Stud Ampere Stud Panel Thickness in Inches (mm) Tube Length in Inches (mm) A B C Tube 20A Short 20A Short 20A Short 20A Long 20A Long 20A Long 010D23G01 010D23G01 010D23G01 010D23G02 010D23G02 010D23G ( ).0.7 ( ).2.0 (6.4.7) ( ).0.7 ( ).2.0 (6.4.7).84 (21.4) 1.09 (27.7) 1.03 (26.2) 3.88 (98.6) 4.13 (104.9) 4.38 (111.3) 46D983H0 46D983H06 46D983H07 010D23H0 010D23H06 010D23H (1.) 1.9 (40.4).9 (1.0) A.03 (.7) 6.66 (169.2) C.31 (7.9) 18 Thread Do Not Use More Than 10 Ft. Lbs. Torque to Tighten Nuts.0 (.7) 13 Thread Breaker Figure -42. J-Frame Mounting Panel B 3.63 (92.2) Table K-Frame Ordering Information Stud Length Stud Panel Thickness in Inches (mm) Tube Length in Inches (mm) Standard Tube Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D E F 400A Short 400A Short 400A Short 400A Long 400A Long 400A Long 6642C14G C14G C14G C14G C14G0 6642C14G ( )..7 ( ).2. (6.3.7).7 1 ( )..7 ( ).2. (6.3.7).84 (21.3) 1.09 (27.69) 1.03 (26.16) 3.78 (96.0) 4.03 (102.4) 4.28 (108.7) 313C909H17 313C909H18 313C909H19 313C909H20 313C909H21 313C909H (167.1) 3.66 (93.0).7 16 ( ) Mounting Panel B E Breaker Mounting Surface F Thread.06 (1.) A C 1.67 (42.4) D Figure -43. K-Frame Discount Symbol CB-2

202 -202 External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0668] Table L-Frame Ordering Information Stud Length (A) in Inches (mm).47 (138.9) 7.97 (202.4) (26.9).44 (11.2) Stud 314C960G07 314C960G08 314C960G09 A Insulators Washer Nut Table -42. M-Frame Ordering Information Stud Ampere Not UL Listed. Diameter, in Inches (mm) and Thread.0 (.7) 13.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) (2.4) 1.00 (2.4) 1.00 (2.4) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) Extension Back of Breaker, in Inches (mm) 3.66 (93.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (213.6) (277.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (213.6) (277.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (213.6) (277.0) Stud s 314C960G01 314C960G04 314C960G0 314C960G06 314C960G07 314C960G08 314C960G09 314C960G10 314C960G11 314C960G Table N-Frame Ordering Information Circuit Breaker Insulating Panel Figure -44. L-Frame Rear Connecting Stud Stud Ampere Not UL Listed. Diameter, in Inches (mm) and Thread 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.2 (31.8) 1.2 (31.8) Extension Back of Breaker, in Inches (mm). (139.7) 8 (203.2) 10. (266.7). (139.7) 10. (266.7) Stud s 623B222G01 623B222G02 623B222G03 373B37G04 373B37G

203 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0669] External Accessories Panelboard Connecting Straps -203 Panelboard Connecting Straps Table K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing (Inches) Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center Outside 3-1/ B78G B77G Table K-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles Product Description Panelboard Connecting Straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility. Table F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing (Inches) 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 Continuous Current (Amperes) 0 10 Pole Connector Type Center 673B142G02 673B142G02 673B142G04 Table F-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles C72G01 3C73G03 3C73G Outside Table J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing (Inches) Continuous Current (Amperes) 624BH02 624BH01 Pole Connector Type Center 673B142G09 673B142G10 673B142G03 3C72G03 3C73G06 3C73G0 Outside /2 20 2D26G D26G , 3 208B264H Table L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center Table L-Frame Mounting Bracket Table -43. M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Table M-Frame Mounting Bracket Outside Table N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Table N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four[4] Required) 624B609G C02G of Poles 2, 3 208B297H Bus Spacing (Inches) Continuous Current (Amperes) Connector Type 3-1/2 800 Short Medium Long Pole Connector Type 314C996G01 314C996G02 314C996G C270H Bus Spacing (Inches) Continuous Current (Amperes) Connector Type 3-1/2 00 Short Medium Long Pole Connector Type 0C606G04 0C606G0 0C606G C270H Table J-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles 2, Discount Symbol CB-2

204 -204 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0670] Handle Mechanisms Overview Handle Mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations Flange Mounted, Through-the-Door and Direct (Close-Coupled) providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Flange Mounted Flex Shaft Through-the-Door Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Universal Direct Euro IEC G Direct Handle mechanisms are typically used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Cutler- Hammer has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (.9 m) through 10 feet (3 m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft Handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8-inch (9. mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, 3R and fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. Flex Shaft is UL Listed under File E64893 and meets CSA requirements.

205 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0671] External Accessories Handle Mechanisms -20 Table Flex Shaft Ordering Information Breaker Frame EF FJ G F F (Dual) J K L and MDL N R Flexible Shaft Length (Ft.) EHMFS03 JHMFS03 F0S03C F1S03C F1S03CD F2S03C F3S03C N/A N/A N/A EHMFS04 JHMFS04 F0S04C F1S04C F1S04CD F2S04C F3S04C F4S04C FS04C F6S04C EHMFS0 JHMFS0 F0S0C F1S0C F1S0CD F2S0C F3S0C F4S0C FS0C F6S0C EHMFS06 JHMFS06 F0S06C F1S06C F1S06CD F2S06C F3S06C F4S06C FS06C F6S06C Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) Table Standard Door Hardware (Required Adapter Kit) Latch 2 point 2 point 3 point Table Door Hardware Adapter Kit (Required on Standard Door Hardware) Panel Height Up to 30 in. Up to 40 in. Over 40 in. DH1R DH2R DH3R Table Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Continued) Breaker Frame EF FJ G F F (Dual) J K L and MDL N R Flexible Shaft Length (Ft.) EHMFS07 JHMFS07 F0S07C F1S07C F1S07CD F2S07C F3S07C N/A N/A N/A EHMFS08 JHMFS08 F0S08C F1S08C F1S08CD F2S08C F3S08C N/A N/A N/A EHMFS09 JHMFS09 F0S09C F1S09C F1S09CD F2S09C F3S09C EHMFS10 JHMFS10 F0S10C F1S10C F1S10CD F2S10C F3S10C Note: Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add X to complete. Add I to complete for IEC handle. Add L to complete for 6-inch (12.4 mm) handle. Original narrow handle design (No C ) is available. Remove C from. Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Note: Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. N/A N/A N/A F4S10C FS10C N/A AMTDHA. Table Door Hardware for Hoffman A 2 Enclosure Latch 2 point 3 point Panel Height Up to 40 in. Over 40 in. HDH-2R HDH-3R Kit consists of special door hardware and door interlock pin. Available for right hand flange mounting only. Table Flange Mounted Instruction Leaflets Breaker Frame Flex Shaft EF FJ G F J K L and M N R Instruction Leaflet/ FRED 29C26 29C18 TBD Discount Symbol CB-2

206 -206 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0672] Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Series C Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, base operating mechanism and shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Rotary and Universal Rotary handle mechanisms are for use with Molded Case Circuit Breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), Molded Case Switches and Motor Circuit Protectors. Rotary is suitable for use with NEMA 1, 3R, and 4/4X enclosure types. Type 4/4X application requires special handle, see Ordering Information. Universal Rotary is suitable for use with NEMA 1 and enclosure types. All Rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off, to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. All Rotary handles indicate ON/ OFF/Tripped/Reset positions, however, Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). Rotary handle is metal, Universal Rotary is made of molded material. Rotary handle is black and Universal Rotary is available in black or yellow/red. Rotary handle was ergonomically designed with extra clearance for a gloved hand to operate. handle has a 4 degree rotation. Universal Rotary has a 90 degree rotation ( pipe valve operation) where ON is vertical and OFF is horizontal. shafts include a support brace to ensure proper alignment. In addition, the 16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm) extra long shafts include an adjustable support bracket. Rotary and Universal Rotary, are UL Listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC947-1/2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File E Universal Rotary

207 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0673] External Accessories Handle Mechanisms -207 Table Series C Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length Inches (mm) G-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) F-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) J-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) K-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) L- and MDL-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) M-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) N-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) Complete HM0R06 HM0R HM0R16 HM0R24 HM1R06 HM1R HM1R16 HM1R24 HM2R06 HM2R HM2R16 HM2R24 HM3R06 HM3R HM3R16 HM3R24 HM4R06 HM4R HM4R16 HM4R24 HM7R06 HM7R HM7R16 HM7R24 HMR06 HMR HMR16 HMR Separate Standard Handle 6648C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G C22G Breaker Mechanism 6648C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G 6648C23G 6648C23G 6648C23G 6648C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G C23G19 Complete includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. Handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R and enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X to complete. Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. IEC Handle Mechanism supplied with Metric thread mounting hardware. Complete includes a handle, mechanism and shaft Shaft 4217B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G B37G IEC IP6 WHM1R06 WHM1R WHM1R16 WHM1R24 WHM2R06 WHM2R WHM2R16 WHM2R24 WHM3R06 WHM3R WHM3R16 WHM3R24 WHM4R06 WHM4R WHM4R16 WHM4R24 WHMR06 WHMR WHMR16 WHMR IEC IP66 WHM1R06X WHM1RX WHM1R16X WHM1R24X WHM2R06X WHM2RX WHM2R16X WHM2R24X WHM3R06X WHM3RX WHM3R16X WHM3R24X WHM4R06X WHM4RX WHM4R16X WHM4R24X WHMR06X WHMRX WHMR16X WHMR24X Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648C22G03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. Table -44. Series C Auxiliary Switch 108A61G Note: Refer to CD-ROM, SA.74A.01.T.E, for replacement type Vari-depth and AMT handle mechanisms. Discount Symbol CB-2

208 -208 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0674] Table Universal Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length in Inches (mm) EF-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) FJ-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) G-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) F-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) J-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) K-Frame 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) L- and MDL-Frames 6 (12.4) (304.8) 16 (406.4) 24 (609.6) Handle Color Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Complete EHMVD06B EHMVDB EHMVD06R EHMVDR FJHMVD06B FJHMVDB FJHMVD06R FJHMVDR GHMVD06B GHMVDB GHMVD06R GHMVDR FHMVD06B FHMVDB FHMVD06R FHMVDR JHMVD06B JHMVDB JHMVD06R JHMVDR KHMVD06B KHMVDB KHMVD06R KHMVDR LHMVD06B LHMVDB LHMVD06R LHMVDR Table Through-the-Door Instruction Leaflets/FRED Breaker Frame EF FJ G F J K L & MDL N Rotary Universal Rotary 29C17 29C19 29C20 29C20 29C20 29C20 29C20 Discount Symbol CB-2

209 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [067] Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Universal Direct Euro IEC Direct G Direct External Accessories Handle Mechanisms Product Description Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-Door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is designed exclusively for the new Cutler-Hammer E and J20 circuit breakers. It is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. G Direct is available with a black or yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL489 listed, IEC947-1/2 and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC G Direct is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. -209

210 -210 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0676] Table Universal Direct Ordering Information Frame Universal Direct Domestic with Interlock (white) w/o Interlock (white) Universal Direct International w/o Interlock (charcoal with global label) Handle Extension EF FJ EHMCCBI JHMCCBI EHMCCB JHMCCB EHMCCR JHMCCR Table Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information Frame Black Handle Red Handle F J K L and M N R Table -40. G Direct Ordering Information Frame Black Handle Yellow Handle with shroud w/o shroud with shroud w/o shroud GD/ GC/ GHC Suitable for use on 2- or 3-Pole G-Frame. HMCC1B HMCC2B HMCC3B HMCC4B HMCCB HMCC6B Table -41. Direct (Close-Coupled) Instruction Leaflets HMCC1R HMCC2R HMCC3R HMCC4R HMCCR HMCC6R HRGCC1S HRGCC HRGCC3S HRGCC GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC HRGMC3S HRGMC Frame Instruction Leaflet/FRED Universal Direct Euro IEC Direct G Direct Handle Extension is not included with J-, K-, L- and M-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. Table -42. Handle Extension Frame J, K L, M Handle Extension is included with breaker with N- and R-Frame breakers. Table -43. Handle Extension Frame N R Style HEX3 HEX4 Style HEX HEX EF FJ G F J K L and MDL N R 29C2 29C26 29C288A 29C288A 29C288A 29C289 29C290 29C Discount Symbol CB-2

211 January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0677] External Accessories Current Limiters, Alarms, Monitors and Test Kits -211 Type LFD Current Limiter Table -4. GF Alarm Ordering Information Description Potential Transformer Module Ground Fault Alarm Unit Face Mounting Bracket GFAU C67G Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C614 Diagram The LFD Current Limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 200,000A interrupting capacity at up to V AC. LFD current limiters for thermalmagnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E Table -44. Ordering Information Circuit Breaker Amperes LFD3070R LFD310R Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C407 Ground Fault Alarm Unit 70. 1,09. IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (10 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-phase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through phases A and C. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED The Potential Transformer Module is required for Digitrip OPTIM to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The Potential Transformer Module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to V line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Table -46. Module Ordering Information Description Potential Transformer Module Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C894 Diagram Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit DOPTMLN 1, The Ground Fault Alarm Unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit requires a separate 0V AC power source to power the light and the internal relay which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame. For more information see Descriptive Bulletin The Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 0-volt, 0/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker. Table -47. Test Kit Ordering Information Description Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit STK2 2,720. Note: Instruction/FRED 270 Discount Symbol CB-2

212 -2 External Accessories OPTIM System Components January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0678] Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer Auxiliary Power Module The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 24V DC power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Cutler-Hammer specifications. The BIM is a member of the Cutler-Hammer PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to Cutler-Hammer PowerNet software. Table -48. Ordering Information BIM 2,3. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C893 The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eight-pin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The Auxiliary Power Module is optional. Table -49. Ordering Information OPTIMizer Standard Package 1,110. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C892 Note: 24V DC Power Supply A 24V DC power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Cutler- Hammer PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker s load is 4 ma of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 24V DC power supply should be an isolated high quality power supply with a CE label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Cutler-Hammer recommendations. The Auxiliary Power Module is a power supply requiring 0V AC input at 0 or 60 Hz that provides a 32V DC output. The Auxiliary Power Module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The Auxiliary Power Module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the Auxiliary Power Module would be for the testing of a stand-alone noncommunicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 32V DC control power, although 24V DC is the standard on OPTIM breakers. Table Ordering Information PRTAAPM 23. Note: Instruction Leaflet/FRED 29C890 Discount Symbol CB-2